TEST BANK for Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013 Comprehensive by Mary Anne Poasty Keith Mulbery Jason D

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013 Comprehensive by Mary Anne Poatsy Keith Mulbery Jason Davidson Robert Grauer (Test Bank All Chapters, 100% Original Verified, A+ Grade) Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 1 Introduction to Excel: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) Pressing Tab moves the insertion point ________.

A) down a row in the same column B) to the beginning of the next row C) right one cell D) left one cell Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 2) If .25 is typed and Enter or Tab is pressed, Excel will automatically: A) add a percent sign after the number.

B) delete the number.

C) add a zero in front of the decimal point.

D) insert a formula.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 3) Which of the following symbols represents division?

A) / B) \ C) ÷ D) ^ Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 4) All Excel formulas begin with ________.

A) * B) @ C) = D) # Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 5) Double-clicking on the fill handle copies a formula until: A) a new formula is entered.

B) the Tab key is pressed.

C) the Enter key is pressed.

D) a blank row is encountered.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) Excel displays a series of ________ to indicate that the column width is too narrow to display entire cell contents.

A) asterisks * B) pound signs # C) exclamation marks !

D) ampersands @ Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Mathematics and Formulas 7) What is the value of =1+2*3^2?

A) 19 B) 49 C) 27 D) 81 Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Mathematics and Formulas 8) To display formulas instead of formula results you press Ctrl + ________.

A) @ B) " C) $ D) ` Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Mathematics and Formulas 9) The check mark between the Name Box and the Formula Bar indicates ________.

A) Go B) Enter C) Complete D) Correct Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management 10) To change the color of a worksheet tab, you ________, click Tab Color from the menu, and select the desired color from the palette.

A) click B) right-click C) double-click D) triple-click Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) To automatically adjust the width of column C, you: A) double-click the column C heading.

B) right-click the column C heading.

C) double-click the border between columns C and D in the column headings.

D) double-click the border between columns B and C in the column headings.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management 12) When copying or cutting a range of cells, the range is: A) surrounded by a solid green border.

B) surrounded by a moving dashed green border.

C) surrounded by a solid black border.

D) surrounded by a moving dashed black border.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Clipboard Tasks 13) When pasting the contents of the Clipboard, options such as Formulas & Number Formatting and Values & Source Formatting are displayed by selecting the destination cell or cells and ________.

A) clicking Paste B) clicking the Paste arrow C) double-clicking D) clicking the object in the Clipboard Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Clipboard Tasks 14) The term ________ refers how data are placed in cells.

A) positioning B) configuration C) arrangement D) alignment Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15)

In the figure shown above, row 1 is the result of clicking ________.

A) Merge Across B) Merge & Center C) Align to Center D) Align to Middle Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting 16)

The four cells shown in figure above, are the result of clicking ________.

A) Text Wrap B) Word Wrap C) Merge & Center D) Orientation Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting 17)

The figure shown above, depicts the ________ button.

A) Center B) Wrap Text C) Decrease Decimal D) Increase Decimal Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting 18) Landscape and Portrait are examples of page ________.

A) alignment B) arrangement C) positioning D) orientation Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 6: Page Setup and Printing 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

19) A ________ appears at the top of each printed page.

A) header B) caption C) banner D) title Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 6: Page Setup and Printing 20) Pressing Tab moves the insertion point right one cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 21) Clear All removes both cell contents and cell formatting.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Introduction to Spreadsheets 22) A workbook and a worksheet are the same thing.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Mathematics and Formulas 23) You can enter formulas by a combination of typing and clicking selected cells.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Mathematics and Formulas 24) You can change the name of a worksheet tab by clicking the tab and retyping the new name.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management 25) To remove a worksheet, you click the worksheet tab and press Delete.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management 26) To remove a row, you click the row number and press Delete.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook and Worksheet Management

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

27) When pasting a range of cells, Values & Formatting copies the source formatting while converting the formulas to their current values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Clipboard Tasks 28) are the Decrease Indent and Increase Indent buttons.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting 29) A frame is a line that encloses a cell or a range of cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 5: Formatting 30) A footer appears at the bottom of each printed page.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 6: Page Setup and Printing

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 1 Introduction to Excel: What Is a Spreadsheet?

1) A spreadsheet is: A) the core of a slide presentation.

B) an electronic file that is used to write text and graphics on the Web. C) an electronic file of a grid of columns and rows of related data.

D) another word for a letter written on a computer.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 2) A workbook is defined as: A) similar to a spreadsheet but hard copy rather than electronic.

B) an unchangeable picture of data.

C) the address of the current cell.

D) a file containing related worksheets.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 3) Which of the following is NOT a standard interface of Microsoft Office applications?

A) Quick Access Toolbar B) Scroll bars C) Ribbon D) Input area Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 4) An input area is defined as: A) a range of cells containing results based on the output area.

B) a display of the name of a worksheet within a workbook.

C) a range of cells containing values for variables used in formulas.

D) the active cell within a workbook.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) An output area is defined as: A) a region of a worksheet with formulas dependent on values from an input area.

B) a display of the range name and tab name within a workbook.

C) a range of cells containing values for variables used in formulas and functions within a worksheet.

D) the active cell on an active worksheet.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 6) The Formula Bar: A) displays the name of a worksheet within a workbook.

B) is located at the intersection of a column and a row.

C) identifies the address of the current cell in a worksheet.

D) displays the formula or contents of an active cell.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 7) What does a sheet tab display?

A) The worksheet and workbook name B) All formulas included on that worksheet C) The address of the current cell D) The name of a worksheet within a workbook Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 8) A cell address: A) identifies the active cell and worksheet.

B) identifies a cell by a column letter and a row number.

C) contains a column letter, a row number, and a worksheet tab name.

D) identifies a worksheet by its column letter and row number.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 9) To display a long text label on two or more lines within a single cell: A) type the first line, press Enter, and type the remaining line.

B) insert a line break with Alt+Enter.

C) insert a line break with Ctrl+Enter.

D) use F2 to insert a line break after the first line.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) AutoComplete: A) adds all numbers in the row automatically.

B) searches for and displays any other similar label in the current column when you begin typing.

C) adds numbers within a column automatically.

D) searches for and displays any other similar label in the current row when you begin typing.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 11) A value: A) controls the sequence in which Excel performs arithmetic operations.

B) is a number that represents a quantity and can be the basis of calculations.

C) includes letters, numbers, and spaces.

D) is a combination of cell references, operators, values, and/or functions used to perform calculations.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 12) Press ________ to enter data into a cell and keep that cell as the active cell.

A) F2 B) Ctrl+F2 C) Shift+F4 D) Ctrl+Enter Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 13) A formula is: A) a number that represents a date and can be the basis of calculations.

B) a combination of cell references, operators, values, and/or functions used to perform calculations.

C) a number that represents a quantity and can be the basis of calculations.

D) entered into a cell by pressing F2.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 14) You should use cell references in formulas instead of constant values so that: A) you can easily include letters, numbers, and spaces.

B) it is easier to debug the errors.

C) you can change the input values without changing the formulas.

D) you can control the sequence in which Excel performs arithmetic operations.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create formulas 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) The order of precedence in Excel 2013: A) includes letters, numbers, and spaces.

B) controls the sequence in which Excel performs arithmetic operations.

C) is a software application used to create and modify business communications.

D) includes formulas, functions, and formatting.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create formulas 16) Auto Fill in Excel 2013: A) enables you to copy the contents of a cell or to continue a sequence by dragging the fill handle.

B) is the fastest way to type A1 in the name box.

C) is adjustable so you can display more or fewer characters in a column.

D) helps carry over the fill to the remaining worksheets.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 17) The fill handle: A) is a red bolded circle at the bottom-right of an active cell.

B) helps carry over the fill in an active cell to another range.

C) is the same action as pressing the Enter key.

D) is a small green square at the bottom-right corner of a cell.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 18) Using the fill handle on a cell containing a formula: A) cannot complete a sequence of dates in a column.

B) changes the background color of the selected cells to yellow.

C) copies the formula in the active cell to other cells and adapts it based upon the type of cell references in the original formula.

D) has two or more sub-commands related to the command.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 19) Which of the following is NOT a way to insert a new worksheet?

A) Click New sheet to the right of the last tab B) Press Ctrl+F11 C) Right-click a tab, select Insert from the shortcut menu, click Worksheet D) Click the Insert arrow in the Cells group, select Insert Sheet Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Manage worksheets 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Column width: A) is adjustable so you can display more or less characters in a column.

B) is not adjustable so keep the formulas as short as possible.

C) always switches back to default.

D) is best left unchanged unless you absolutely have to.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Manage columns and rows 21) Which of the following is NOT a way to unhide column A in a worksheet?

A) Type A1 in the name box and then press the Enter key B) Right-click the hidden column heading and select Unhide C) Click Select All and use the Hide & Unhide submenu D) Click Unhide on the View tab Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Manage columns and rows 22) A range: A) cannot be selected with the mouse.

B) is the numbers that fall between the smallest and largest in a formula or function.

C) is another word for the active worksheet.

D) refers to a group of adjacent or contiguous cells.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 23) To select a range by using the name box: A) click in the name box and type the range address such as B15:D25 and then press Enter.

B) select the name box from the File menu and choose Range.

C) position the mouse pointer over the column headings holding the Alt key.

D) click in the first cell of the range, hold the Ctrl key, and then click in the last cell of the range.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 24) Copy as Picture can be a useful command when: A) you do not have a printer available.

B) the formulas, functions, and headings need to be tested even if it's been pasted into a Word document.

C) you simply want to paste (and not edit) into a Word document.

D) you need to edit the data quickly even if it has been pasted into PowerPoint of Word.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) The wrap text feature in Excel: A) can be downloaded as an add-on to Excel 2013.

B) enables long formulas to wrap to two or more lines within a single cell.

C) is most useful with very short titles or column headings.

D) enables data to appear on two or more lines within a cell.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 26) A border: A) is data from another cell that is only temporarily residing in an active cell.

B) is a line that surrounds a cell or a range of cells.

C) never prints.

D) is preset and weight cannot be adjusted.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 27) Which of the following is FALSE pertaining to Excel number formats?

A) When you apply a number format, you can specify the number of decimal places.

B) Changing number formats changes the way a number displays in a cell.

C) Values have no special formatting when you enter data into cells.

D) The default number format is Comma.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 28) Which of the following is NOT a number format available in the Number group on the Home tab?

A) Comma Style B) Percent Style C) Accounting Number Format D) Date Format Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 29) Which of the following is NOT an option available on the Page Layout tab of Excel 2013?

A) Select the print area B) Select the number format C) Select orientation D) Set the margins Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

30) The Print Preview feature in Excel 2013 is available: A) on the Quick Access Toolbar.

B) on the Page Layout tab.

C) in Microsoft Office Backstage view.

D) on the View tab.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 12. Preview and print a worksheet 31) By default new workbooks contain three worksheets.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 32) To begin a formula in a cell, first type the # symbol.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 33) The order of precedence in Excel is the same as the basic order of operations in math.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 34) To display cell formulas, press Ctrl and the asterisk (*).

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Display cell formula 35) In Excel 2013, it is only possible to add a new worksheet when the workbook is created.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Manage worksheets 36) Double-clicking a worksheet tab allows you to rename the tab.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Manage worksheets 37) To help manage your worksheets within a workbook, worksheets tabs can be assigned unique patterns and even icon pictures.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Manage worksheets

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

38) When you hide a column or row, the data is not deleted, it is just hidden.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Manage columns and rows 39) Excel data can be copied and pasted into a Word or PowerPoint document.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 40) Formatting data makes it difficult to read and tends to obscure meaningful details.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 41) Once cells have been merged they cannot be unmerged.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 42) Text in a cell can by angled clockwise.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 43) Use horizontal alignment to move data in a cell closer to the top or bottom of the cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 44) Merge & Center is not a good tool for creating titles of headings in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 45) Changing the number format of a cell changes the value of the number stored in the cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 46) Comma, Date, Time, and Fraction are all number formats available in Excel 2013.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 10. Apply number formats

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

47) A Special number format allows characters such as hyphens.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 48) The Date number format only allows Long Date, for example, March 14, 2016.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 49) The Page Setup dialog box contains additional options not found on the Excel Ribbon.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 50) While it is common to center a worksheet horizontally on a page, it is not possible to center it vertically on the page in Excel 2013.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 51) Default margins on an Excel 2013 worksheet are .75" top and bottom.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 52) Column headings or row labels can be repeated on multiple-page printouts using the Print Titles Page Setup option.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 53) The &[Page] code used in a cell displays the number of pages in a workbook.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 54) Excel displays data in gridlines of columns and rows. Those grid lines always appear on the printed document.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 55) Before printing a worksheet, click the File tab and select Print to preview the worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 12. Preview and print a worksheet 9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

56) The ________ Toolbar allows a user to quickly save, undo, and redo or repeat commands in Excel 2013.

Answer: Quick Access Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 57) The ________ of a workbook displays the file name as well as the software name.

Answer: title bar Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 58) A(n) ________ is a single spreadsheet.

Answer: worksheet Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 59) The ________ button on a worksheet appears as a triangle at the intersection of the row and column headings.

Answer: Select All Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 60) The ________ bar displays information about a selected command or operation in progress.

Answer: Status Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 61) The ________ command is helpful for navigating to a cell that is not visible onscreen.

Answer: Go To Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 62) To display a different worksheet click the sheet ________ at the bottom of the workbook window.

Answer: tab Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 63) A number that represents a quantity or amount is called a(n) ________.

Answer: value Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

64) A combination of cell references, arithmetic operations, values, and/or functions used in calculations is called a(n) ________.

Answer: formula Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 65) For Excel to recognize a formula, it must start with a(n) ________ sign.

Answer: equal OR = Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create formulas 66) The order of ________ controls the sequence in which Excel does math.

Answer: precedence Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create formulas 67) You can copy the contents of a cell or a range of cells by dragging the ________.

Answer: fill handle Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 68) Use ________ to complete a sequence in a worksheet such as January, February, March, and April.

Answer: Auto Fill Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 69) The Show Formulas button is accessible from the ________ tab.

Answer: Formulas Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Display cell formula 70) Click Format in the Cells group on the ________ tab to change the color of a worksheet tab.

Answer: Home Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Manage worksheets 71) Adjust the column ________ to accommodate the widest entry in a column.

Answer: width Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Manage columns and rows 72) If you select cells R45:S46 and T49:V53 you have selected a(n) ________ range.

Answer: nonadjacent Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

73) Use the ________ to select a range by clicking in it and typing a range address, and then pressing Enter.

Answer: Name Box Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 74) When you've selected and subsequently cut the range, it is copied to the ________.

Answer: Clipboard Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 75) If you enter data into a worksheet and decide you want the columns and rows reversed, you can click the Paste arrow, and then click ________.

Answer: Transpose Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 76) ________ refers to how data are positioned in cells.

Answer: Alignment Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 77) The default number format in Excel 2013 is ________.

Answer: General Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 78) The ________ format includes an optional dollar sign placed immediately to the left of a number.

Answer: Currency Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 79) The ________ feature on in Page Setup displays a list to set or clear a print area on a worksheet.

Answer: Print Area Diff: 3 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 80) The ________ view displays print options and displays a worksheet in print preview mode.

Answer: Office Backstage Diff: 3 Objective: 12. Preview and print a worksheet

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. spreadsheet II. Title bar III. worksheet IV. workbook V. Ribbon A. electronic file that contains a grid of columns and rows B. contains file name and software name C. commands organized into groups D. file containing related worksheets E. spreadsheet that contains formulas, functions, values, etc.

Answer: A, B, E, D, C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 82) Match the parts of the Excel Window to their meanings: I. Name Box II. Formula Bar III. sheet tab IV. Select All V. active cell A. displays the contents of the active cell B. displays the name of a worksheet within a workbook C. current cell indicated by a dark green border D. identifier that displays the address of the current cell E. intersection of a column or row Answer: D, A, B, E, C Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives 83) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. F2 II. Shift+F11 III. text IV. value V. formula A. number that represents a quantity used for calculations B. combination of cell references, operators, values, and/or functions to perform a calculation C. combination of letters, numbers, symbols D. insert a new worksheet E. make changes to cell contents Answer: E, D, C, A, B Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

84) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. Page Number II. Orientation III. Accounting IV. Vertical V. Concatenation A. Header and Footer element B. Number format C. Page Setup command D. Alignment option E. Order of precedence Answer: A, C, B, D, E Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 85) Match the keystrokes to their descriptions: I. Page Up II. Page Down III. Tab IV. Ctrl+Home V. Ctrl+End A. move insertion point up one screen B. move insertion point down one screen C. move right one cell in the same row D. move insertion point to cell A1 E. move insertion point to the last active corner in the worksheet Answer: A, B, C, D, E Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Explore the Excel window 86) Match the type of data that can be entered into a cell with its description: I. text II. values III. dates IV. formulas V. AutoComplete A. 3-Oct-16, for example B. Quarter 1, for example C. cell references, arithmetic operations, and values used in calculations D. 534.34, for example E. displays other labels in that column that match the letters you type Answer: B, D, A, C, E Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

87) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. formulas II. semi-selection III. starts all formulas IV. A2+A3 V. =C24*D24 A. pointing to cells when building a formula B. change static numbers into meaningful results C. text D. formula E. equal sign (=) Answer: B, A, E, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create formulas 88) Match the arithmetic operators in order of precedence: I. Parentheses II. Exponent III. Multiplication IV. Division V. Addition A. 3rd in order of precedence B. 1st in order of precedence C. 4th in order of precedence D. 5th in order of precedence E. 2nd in order of precedence Answer: B, E, A, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create formulas 89) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. fill pointer II. series of pound signs III. Auto Fill IV. fill handle V. display cell formulas A. thin black plus sign B. cell is too narrow to display a full value C. Ctrl + ` combination D. copying the contents of a cell or range by dragging E. small square at the bottom-right corner of a cell Answer: A, B, D, E, C Diff: 3 Objective: Multiple objectives 15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

90) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. range II. Copy as Picture command III. nonadjacent range IV. Copy V. select all cells in a worksheet A. C10:C20 and E10:E20 B. default copy option C. cannot edit individual cell data D. press Ctrl+A twice E. group of adjacent or contiguous cells Answer: E, C, A, B, D Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data 91) When B5 is the active cell and you press Ctrl+Enter, what happens?

Answer: The label, value, or formula is entered into cell B5 and B5 remains the active cell.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Enter and edit cell data 92) Briefly describe the data type "Text." Provide one or two examples of text entries in an Excel worksheet.

Answer: Text is any combination of letters, numbers, symbols, and spaces not used in calculations. Worksheet titles such as "Juan's Taqueria Quarterly Sales" or a social security number such as 123-45-6789 are text entries.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create formulas 93) If you have =D5*E5 in cell F5 and want to copy that down to F6 through F12, assuming data is contained in cells D6:E12, what is the quickest and easiest way to do that?

Answer: Click in cell F5, place your cursor over the fill handle until the cursor changes to a small, black plus sign. Double-click the fill handle to quickly copy the formula down through cell F12.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Auto Fill 94) Describe a nonadjacent range, provide an example, and describe how to select a nonadjacent range.

Answer: A nonadjacent range contains two or more cells or ranges that are not touching each other; for example, C10:C13 and E15:E25. Select the first range, press and hold Ctrl, and select the additional range or ranges.

Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Select, move, copy, and paste data

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) Describe alignment in relation to Excel 2013. How is text automatically aligned, how are values automatically aligned, and how are dates automatically aligned?

Answer: Alignment refers to how data are positioned in cells. Text aligns at the left cell margin, and dates and values align at the right cell margin.

Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Apply alignment and font options 96) How do the Comma, Accounting, and Currency formats differ?

Answer: The Comma format includes the comma as a separator for numbers of 1,000 and over.

The Accounting format includes a dollar sign placed at the left border of the cell. The Currency format includes a dollar sign placed immediately to the left of the number.

Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 97) Why would you want to use the Increase Decimal or Decrease Decimal buttons on the Home tab?

Answer: Use Increase Decimal or Decrease Decimal on the Home tab to display more decimal places for greater or lesser precision. If, for example, a whole column contains whole dollar values and no cents, displaying .00 down the column looks cluttered. It is also important for number formats to be consistent and decreasing or increasing decimal places can keep numbers consistent in a row, column, or range.

Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Apply number formats 98) Describe page orientation when printing. What is the default and in what circumstances may you want to change orientation?

Answer: Orientation displays the orientation of the physical page--portrait, for worksheets with more rows than columns, and landscape, for worksheets with more columns than can fit in portrait orientation. Portland orientation is the default. Landscape orientation is more appropriate when a worksheet has many columns and fewer rows.

Diff: 2 Objective: 11. Select page setup options 99) Describe three features available for headers and/or footers.

Answer: A header and/or footer can appear at the top and/or bottom of every printed page of a workbook. You can create different headers or footers on different pages. You can create a header or footer that is different on the first page than on all other pages. You can also include your name, the date of the worksheet, and page numbers.

Diff: 3 Objective: 11. Select page setup options

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) How would you print multiple worksheets?

Answer: To print multiple worksheets, click the first sheet tab, press and hold Shift, and then click the last sheet tab. If you choose to select nonadjacent sheets, press and hold Ctrl as you click each sheet tab. When Print options display in Microsoft Office Backstage view, choose Print Active Sheets.

Diff: 3 Objective: 12. Preview and print a worksheet

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 2 Formulas and Functions: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) When copying a cell, the term absolute cell reference indicates ________.

A) the value of the cell will not change B) the cell label will not change C) cell reference will not change D) the cell can only be referenced one time Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics 2) =D$3 is an example of a(n) ________ cell reference.

A) relative B) absolute C) mixed D) combined Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics 3) When cell C3 containing the formula =B6*C8 is copied to cell D2, the formula in cell D2 is ________.

A) =B6*C8 B) =B6*B7 C) =C5*D8 D) =C5*D7 Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics 4) A formula that refers to its own cell creates a(n) ________ reference.

A) circular B) cross C) absolute D) erroneous Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) The MEDIAN function is used to find the ________ number in a range of cells.

A) average B) middle C) lowest D) highest Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 6) The value of =C3+C4+C5+C6+C7+C8+C9 can be calculated by using ________.

A) =TOTAL(C3:C9) B) =SUM(C3:C9) C) =TOTAL(C3...C9) D) =SUM(C3...C9) Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 7) If you wanted to determine how many cells in a range are not empty, you would use the ________ function.

A) COUNTA B) COUNT C) MEDIAN D) MAXIMUM Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 8) Which Excel function displays the current date?

A) CURRENT B) DAY C) NOW D) TODAY Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

9)

The expression that implements the flow chart shown in the above figure is ________.

A) IF(E2>B$2,0,B$3) B) IF(E2>B$2,B$3,0) C) IF(B$3,0,E2>B$2) D) IF(B$3,E2>B$2,0) Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Logical, Lookup, and Financial Functions 10)

Using the table shown above, you would use the ________ function to find interest rates corresponding to the number of years.

A) HLOOKUP B) VLOOKUP C) IF D) INDEX Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Logical, Lookup, and Financial Functions 11) The name for a range can begin with a letter or ________.

A) underscore (_) B) hyphen (-) C) number D) period (.)

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: Range Names

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

12) A range name can contain up to ________ characters.

A) 25 B) 100 C) 255 D) 300 Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: Range Names 13) =D5 is an example of an absolute cell reference.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics 14) =$R$5 is an example of a mixed cell reference.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Formula Basics 15) To tally a column, you would use the COUNT function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 16) The TODAY and NOW functions return the same result.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 17) AVERAGE and MEDIAN are two functions used to determine central tendencies.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Function Basics 18) The IF function is an example of a Logical function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Logical, Lookup, and Financial Functions 19) The PMT function calculates the amount of a mortgage.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Logical, Lookup, and Financial Functions

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Range names are edited and deleted using the Name Manager.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: Range Names

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 2 Formulas and Functions: Performing Quantitative Analysis 1) A relative cell reference: A) indicates a cell's specific location and the reference does not change when you copy the formula to another cell or range.

B) contains both an absolute and a relative cell reference.

C) indicates a cell's relative location from the cell containing the formula; the reference changes when you copy the formula.

D) occurs when a formula directly refers to the cell containing the formula.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 2) An absolute cell reference: A) causes a potential error.

B) indicates a cell's specific location and the reference does not change when you copy the formula.

C) happens only when a formula indirectly refers to the cell containing the formula.

D) contains both an absolute and a relative cell reference.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 3) A mixed cell reference: A) occurs when a formula directly or indirectly refers to the cell containing the formula.

B) causes a potential error.

C) contains absolute or relative cell references, but not both.

D) contains both an absolute and a relative cell reference.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 4) A circular reference: A) is a predefined formula that performs a calculation.

B) is a rule that governs the structure and components for functions.

C) occurs when a formula directly or indirectly refers to the cell containing the formula.

D) is an input such as a cell reference or a value needed to complete a function.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Correct circular references

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Which of the following is FALSE about a function in Excel?

A) A function is a predefined formula that performs a calculation.

B) There are more than 400 functions in Excel 2013.

C) Functions are organized into two categories in Excel.

D) Functions in Excel must adhere to correct syntax.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 6) Syntax: A) displays a list of functions and defined names as you enter a function.

B) is a small pop-up description that displays the arguments for a function as you enter it.

C) is a set of rules that govern the structure and components for a function.

D) is an input such as a cell reference or a value needed to complete a function.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 7) Formula AutoComplete: A) results in formulas such as =B4+C4.

B) calculates the total of values contained in two or more cells.

C) is a small pop-up description that displays the arguments for a function as you enter it.

D) displays a list of functions and defined names as you enter a function.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function 8) What does a function ScreenTip do?

A) Automatically inserts functions such as SUM (B4:C4) B) Calculates the total of values contained in two or more cells C) Automatically inserts formulas such as =B4+C4 D) Displays a small pop-up description of the arguments for a function as you enter it Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function 9) Argument names that display in ________ are required; others are optional.

A) italic B) all caps C) red D) bold Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) When #NAME? displays in a cell, you may have: A) used a range name that doesn't exist.

B) used a worksheet name in the formula that does not exist.

C) mistyped a workbook name in a function.

D) mistyped the name of a function.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 11) The SUM function: A) identifies the midpoint value in a set of values.

B) calculates the total of values contained in two or more cells.

C) calculates the arithmetic mean or average of values in a range.

D) displays the lowest value in a range.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 12) How many arguments are required for the SUM function?

A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) It depends on the type of SUM function Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 13) The ellipsis in function syntax indicates that: A) you can add as many additional ranges as desired.

B) the function has an error embedded in it.

C) the function is part of the Logical function category.

D) you are required to add additional ranges.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 14) For a straightforward, basic mathematical expression, it is best to use: A) the arithmetic mean or average of values.

B) a formula like =C16*C17.

C) a function such as =SUM(B4:C4).

D) a nested formula inside of a function.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) What does the MEDIAN function do?

A) Identifies the lowest value in a range B) Identifies the midpoint value in a set of values C) Identifies the highest value in a range D) Tallies the number of cells in a range that contain values Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 16) The COUNTBLANK function: A) tallies the number of blank cells in a range.

B) highlights every blank cell in a range.

C) displays the current date in every blank cell in a range.

D) tallies the number of cells in a range that are not empty.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 17) Which of the following is a new feature in Excel 2013?

A) Lookup tables B) The COUNT functions C) Quick Analysis D) The Range Names feature Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 18) Which of the following is NOT one of Excel's three basic count functions?

A) COUNTA B) COUNTBLANK C) COUNTEMPTY D) COUNT Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 19) A nested function: A) contains data for the basis of the lookup and data to be retrieved.

B) is the lowest value for a specific category or series in a lookup table.

C) looks up a value and returns a related result from the lookup table.

D) contains another function embedded inside one or more of its arguments.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) What does the TODAY function do?

A) Evaluates the day of the week, the date, and the time that the function was entered B) Displays the current date and time C) Displays the current date D) Displays any day that the user enters Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use date functions 21) Which of the following is FALSE about the NOW function?

A) It displays the current date in a cell.

B) It uses the computer's clock to display the date and time.

C) It uses military time.

D) It displays the current date and time.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use date functions 22) The IF function: A) contains data for the basis of the lookup and data to be retrieved.

B) looks up a value and returns a related result from a lookup table.

C) evaluates a condition and returns one value if the condition is true, a different if false.

D) contains another function embedded inside one or more of its arguments.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 23) The logical test: A) is the lowest value for a specific category or series in a lookup table.

B) evaluates true or false.

C) contains another function embedded inside one or more of its arguments.

D) contains data for the basis of the lookup and data to be retrieved.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 24) What is a lookup table used for?

A) It looks up a value and returns a related result.

B) It contains data for the basis of a lookup and the data to be retrieved.

C) It is the lowest value for a specific category or series.

D) It is a reference to a cell containing a value to look up.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) The breakpoint: A) looks up a value and returns a related result from the lookup table.

B) is a range containing a lookup table.

C) is the lowest value for a specific category or series in a lookup table.

D) is a reference to a cell containing a value to look up.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions 26) The lookup value: A) is the argument in a function that identifies which lookup table column from which to return a value.

B) looks in a horizontal table where the first row contains the values.

C) is a reference to a cell containing a value to look up.

D) is a range containing a lookup table.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions 27) The rate in a PMT function is: A) the periodic interest rate, such as a monthly interest rate.

B) the total number of payment rate periods.

C) a word or a string of characters that represent one or more cells.

D) the rate of present value of a loan.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 28) The nper in a PMT function is: A) the total number of payment periods.

B) a word or a string of characters that represent one or more cells.

C) the present value of a loan.

D) a set of range names.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 29) A range name: A) indicates a cell's specific location and the reference does not change when you copy the formula.

B) is a word or a string of characters that represent one or more cells.

C) indicates a cell's relative location from the cell containing the formula.

D) always begins with an equal sign (=).

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

30) To simplify entering ranges in formulas you can use: A) range names.

B) a cell's relative location.

C) both an absolute and a relative cell reference.

D) a cell's absolute location.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 31) The formula =C4*D4 uses only relative cell references.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 32) A circular reference occurs when a formula directly or indirectly refers to the cell containing the formula.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 33) A function in Excel must begin with a plus sign (+).

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 34) Excel displays a red arrow in the top left corner of a cell if it detects a possible error.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 35) An argument is an operator such as an equal sign or a plus sign needed to complete a function.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function 36) Excel 2013 contains more than 650 functions.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function 37) In Excel 2013, the function name describes the purpose of the function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert a function

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

38) Because the SUM function is a rarely used function it has no button on the Ribbon.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 39) The AVERAGE function can be used to calculate the student class average or a quiz or exam.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 40) When you decrease the decimal places that display in a cell, Excel rounds the value stored in that cell and uses the rounded value in calculations.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 41) The TODAY and the NOW functions display the date and time that a workbook was last opened or last calculated.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use date functions 42) The TODAY function displays what is due to be done today.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use date functions 43) The =DATE(year,month,day) function returns a serial number for a date.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use date functions 44) The IF function only evaluates a condition if the condition is true.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 45) The second argument for the IF function is the logical test.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 46) The logical test evaluates true or false.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

47) You can use text within a formula.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 48) A table array for a lookup function is the range that contains the lookup table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions 49) While lookup tables are typically designed vertically, they can also be designed horizontally.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions 50) The PMT function calculates the breakpoint of the lowest value for a specific category.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 51) The pv of a PMT function refers to the present value of a loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 52) A range name can contain up to 450 characters and it must begin with a number.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 53) If you change a range name, you must change all formulas that use that range name as well.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 54) You can choose to use range names in formulas that you create instead of cell references.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 10. Use range names in formulas 55) One benefit of using range names is that if you copy the formula, you do not have to make the cell reference absolute in the formula.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Use range names in formulas 9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

56) A relative cell ________ indicates a cell's relative location.

Answer: reference Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 57) The ________ key toggles between relative, absolute, and mixed references.

Answer: F4 Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 58) A(n) ________ cell reference provides a permanent reference to a specific cell.

Answer: absolute Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 59) If a formula contains a reference to the cell containing a formula, a(n) ________ reference exists.

Answer: circular Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 60) ________ references usually cause inaccurate results.

Answer: Circular Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 61) The ________ function category performs tests and returns the value of the tests.

Answer: Logical Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 62) The ________ function category performs calculations such as averages and standard deviations.

Answer: Statistical Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 63) Formula ________ displays a list of functions and defined names that match the letters that you start typing when creating a formula.

Answer: AutoComplete Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert a function

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

64) The ________ function totals the values in two or more cells and displays the result in the cell containing the function.

Answer: SUM Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 65) The ________ function finds the midpoint value of a list.

Answer: MEDIAN Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 66) Excel provides three basic count functions: COUNT, COUNTA, and ________.

Answer: COUNTBLANK Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 67) ________ is a set of analytical tools to use to apply formatting, create charts, and insert basic functions.

Answer: Quick Analysis Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 68) A(n) ________ function occurs when one function is embedded as an argument within another function.

Answer: nested Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 69) The =DATE(year,month,day) function returns a(n) ________ for a date.

Answer: serial number Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use date functions 70) The =________(serial_number) function displays the day within a given month for a date or its serial number.

Answer: DAY Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use date functions 71) The ________ function returns one value if a condition is true and another if a condition is false.

Answer: IF Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

72) The IF function in Excel 2013 has ________ arguments.

Answer: three, 3 Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 73) The ________ test is an IF function that tests for a true or false of a condition.

Answer: logical Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 74) The ________ is the lowest value in a category of a lookup table.

Answer: breakpoint Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use lookup functions 75) The ________ function calculates the periodic payment for a loan with interest.

Answer: PMT Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 76) The PMT function uses ________ required arguments and up to two optional arguments.

Answer: three, 3 Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 77) The first argument in a PMT function is the ________.

Answer: rate Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Calculate payments with the PMT function 78) A range name can contain 255 characters and must begin with a(n) ________ or an underscore.

Answer: letter Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 79) You can highlight a range and create a name for the range by clicking on the ________ tab.

Answer: Formulas Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 80) A range name cannot include special characters or ________.

Answer: spaces Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) Match the function categories to their descriptions: I. Logical II. Date & Time III. Statistical IV. Financial V. Lookup & Reference A. looks up values in cells and creates links to cells B. performs test with AND, OR, and NOT C. provides methods for manipulating date and time values D. averages and standard deviations, for example E. performs financial calculations such as payments rates, and present value.

Answer: B, C, D, E, A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert a function 82) Match the terms to their descriptions: I. Argument II. Function III. Formula AutoComplete IV. Function ScreenTip V. Syntax A. specific inputs in a function B. displays a list of functions and defined names that match letters as you type C. small pop-up description that displays a function's arguments D. rules that dictate structure and components required for calculations E. predefined computation that can perform complex computations Answer: A, E, B, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 83) Match the math and statistical functions to their descriptions: I. =ABS(number) II. =FREQUENCY(data_array,bins_array) III. =INT(number) IV. =MODE.SNGL(number1,[number2],...)

V. =ROUND(number,num_digits) A. counts how often a value appears in a given range B. displays the absolute value of a number C. rounds a value number down to the whole number D. displays the most frequently occurring value in a list E. numbers of 5 and greater go up and less than 5 go down Answer: B, A, C, D, E Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

84) Match the terms to their descriptions: I. Quick Analysis II. Nested function III. Logical test IV. Lookup table V. Breakpoint A. range containing values or text that can be retrieved B. formula that contains either a value or an expression that evaluates to true or false C. when one function is embedded as an argument within another function D. set of analytical tools in Excel 2013 E. lowest value for a category or in a series Answer: D, C, B, A, E Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 85) Match the formulas to their descriptions: I. =($C5+D5)*$E5 II. =(C5+D5)*E5 III. =(C5+D5)*$E$5 IV. =I8*J8 in cell I8 V. =$C$2 A. uses only relative references B. includes an absolute reference C. includes a circular reference D. uses a mixed reference E. uses only an absolute reference Answer: D, A, B, Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

86) Match the date/time function syntax to their descriptions: I. =TODAY() II. =NOW() III. =DATE(year,month) IV. =EDATE(start,_date,months) V. =DAY(serial_number) A. returns the serial number for a date B. displays today's date: month, day, year C. displays the day within a month for a serial number of months from a serial number representing a date D. displays the serial number of a date a specified number of months in the future or past E. displays today's date and current military time Answer: B, E, A, D, C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use date functions 87) Match the argument types to their function: I. (Number1) II. ( ) III. (logical_test,...,...)

IV. (...,table_array,...)

V. (rate,...,...)

A. =SUM B. =TODAY C. =PMT D. =IF E. =VLOOKUP Answer: A, B, D, E, C Diff: 3 Objective: Multiple objectives

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

88) Match the portions of the following functions to their descriptions: I. first argument of an IF function II. display of a function's arguments III. requires just one argument IV. has three arguments V. requires no arguments A. the TODAY function B. the logical test C. ScreenTip D. the SUM function E. the IF function Answer: B, C, D, E, A Diff: 3 Objective: Multiple objectives 89) Match the range names to their descriptions: I. Grades II. COL III. Tax_Rate IV. Commission Rate V. Discount Rate % A. unacceptable name; can't use spaces in names B. acceptable abbreviation for cost-of-living C. unacceptable name; can't use special symbols and spaces D. acceptable range name E. acceptable name with underscore Answer: D, B, E, A, C Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names 90) Match the following Excel buttons with their description: I. Trace Error button II. Auto Fill Options button III. Quick Analysis button IV. Expand button V. Collapse button A. makes a dialog box reappear after collapsing it B. set of tools to use to apply formatting, create charts or tables, or insert basic functions C. displays information about a potential problem D. will allow you to copy only formats E. makes a dialog disappear in order to select a cell or range on a worksheet Answer: C, D, B, A, E Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

91) How are an input area on a worksheet and absolute cell references related?

Answer: An input area is a range in a worksheet that contains values that you can change. You can then create formulas with absolute references to the cells in the input area. In this manner, the results will chance when the values in the input area change and formulas can be copied to other locations knowing that the absolute cells in the formula will remain the same.

Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 92) What is the F4 key used for in Excel 2013?

Answer: The F4 key toggles through relative, absolute, and mixed references. Click a cell reference in a formula, such as B2, and press F4. F4 will change the relative cell reference to absolute, $B$4, then to a mixed reference, B$4, and another mixed reference, $B4.

Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use relative, absolute, and mixed cell references in formulas 93) Describe a circular reference. Provide an example.

Answer: A circular reference occurs if a formula contains a direct or an indirect reference to a cell containing the formula. If, in cell F5, you have a formula of =E5+F5, a circular reference error will show since you're in cell F5 and your formula contains cell F5.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Correct circular references 94) What is syntax and why is it important? Provide an example.

Answer: Syntax is the rules that dictate the structure and components required to perform necessary calculations in a function. To start a function you must begin with an equal sign, followed by the function name, followed by the arguments in parentheses.

Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert a function 95) If you see #NAME? in a cell, what does it refer to and how might it be avoided?

Answer: A cell with #NAME? means that you might have mistyped a function name. To avoid this, it is suggested that you select a function name from the Formula AutoComplete list as you type a function name or use the Insert Function dialog box.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert a function 96) What is Quick Analysis in Excel 2013?

Answer: Quick Analysis is a new feature of Excel 2013. It is a set of analytical tools that apply formatting, create charts or tables, and insert basic functions. When you select a range, the Quick Analysis button displays in the bottom-right corner of the selected range.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

97) How does a nested function work? Provide an example.

Answer: A nested function occurs when one function is embedded as an argument within another function. Each function has its own set of arguments that must be included. For example, =ROUND(AVERAGE(B2:B12),0)--the nested AVERAGE argument averages the range the ROUND argument rounds the result.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert basic math and statistics functions 98) When might you want to use an IF function in a worksheet?

Answer: If you have a situation that calls for a true or false result, an IF statement can be effectively used. It will automatically return one value if the condition is true and returns another value when the condition is not met, or is false.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Determine results with the IF function 99) Describe how the following function works: =DAY(TODAY()) Answer: This is a nested function--a date function inside another date function. The TODAY() function identifies today's date and from that date, the DAY function identifies the day of the month.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use date functions 100) What are the rules for creating range names?

Answer: Range names must be 255 characters or less. Range names must begin with a letter or an underscore and can use a combination of upper- or lowercase letters, numbers, periods, and underscores. A range name cannot contain spaces or special characters. Range names also should be descriptive and should be kept fairly short.

Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create and maintain range names

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 3 Charts: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) A ________ chart shows the proportion of individual parts to the whole.

A) bar B) pie C) line D) column Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 2)

The chart shown above depicts a(n) ________ chart.

A) bar B) surface C) clustered column D) area Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 3)

In the figure shown above, the line points to an ________ slice.

A) exploded B) expanded C) enhanced D) extracted Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

4) Dragging the bottom-right sizing handle on a chart changes its ________.

A) height B) width C) height and width D) position Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 5) Which of the following is NOT a chart element?

A) chart title B) legend C) data series D) data labels Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements 6) depicts the Chart ________ button.

A) Elements B) Styles C) Layout D) Filters Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements 7) Data ________ are used to show the exact value or the name of data points.

A) legends B) labels C) axes D) tables Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

8)

In the figure shown above, the line points to one of the seven ________.

A) titles B) legends C) data series D) data labels Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements 9) A chart ________ determines which data series and categories are displayed in a chart.

A) legend B) filter C) theme D) condensed Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Chart Design and Sparklines 10) depicts the Chart ________ button.

A) Layout B) Styles C) Legends D) Elements Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Chart Design and Sparklines 11) A(n) ________ is a small line or column that is displayed in a single cell.

A) data bar B) icon C) color scale D) sparkline Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Chart Design and Sparklines

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

12)

The chart shown above depicts a clustered column chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 13) Once a chart has been created, you can change its type.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Chart Creation Basics 14) By default, axis titles are displayed when a chart is created.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements 15) By default, axes are displayed when a chart is created.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Chart Elements 16) A chart theme controls the color of the chart and plot areas and the look of the data series.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Chart Design and Sparklines 17) depicts the Chart Filter button.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Chart Design and Sparklines

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 3 Charts: Depicting Data Visually 1) A chart is: A) a group of related data points in an Excel window.

B) a visual depiction of numerical data.

C) a set of numeric values shown on a worksheet.

D) text that describes a group of data points.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 2) The chart area in Excel 2013: A) is always a fill of a picture or a texture.

B) contains the entire chart and all of its elements.

C) is a vertical line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference for measurement.

D) is a horizontal line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference for measurement.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 3) A data point: A) is a numeric value that describes a single value on a chart.

B) is a group of related data points.

C) displays data comparisons vertically in columns.

D) is a numeric value within a range of data.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 4) What is a data series in Excel 2013?

A) Data grouped into vertical columns B) A group of related data points C) Text that describes a group of data points in a chart D) An entire chart and all of its elements on a Chart worksheet Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 5) A category label: A) contains the entire chart and all of its elements.

B) is text that describes a collection of data points in a chart.

C) displays data comparisons vertically in columns.

D) contains graphical representation of values in data series.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) The Y-axis: A) is text that describes a collection of data points in a chart.

B) is a vertical line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference for measurement.

C) compares values for one set of data.

D) is a horizontal line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference for measurement.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 7) To create a chart in Excel 2013, select the data and click the: A) Chart tab.

B) Chart Elements button.

C) Quick Analysis button.

D) Chart Styles button.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 8) Which of the following is NOT one of most commonly used chart types?

A) X Y chart B) Bar chart C) Line chart D) Pie chart Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 9) A stacked column chart: A) places stacks of data in segments on top of each other in one column, with each category in the data series represented by a different color.

B) adds a third dimension to each data series, creating a distorted perspective of the data.

C) compares values across categories using horizontal bars.

D) places (stacks) data in one column per category, with each column having the same height of 100%.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 10) A bar chart: A) uses a line to connect data points in order to show trends over a period of time.

B) compares values across categories using horizontal bars.

C) shows each data point in proportion to the whole data series as a slice in a circular pie.

D) separates one or more pie slices from the rest of the pie chart.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) Which of the following describes a line chart?

A) A line chart separates one or more pie slices from the rest of the pie chart.

B) A line chart shows each data point in proportion to the whole data series as a slice in a circular pie.

C) A line chart emphasizes magnitude of changes over time by filling in the space between lines with a color.

D) A line chart uses a line to connect data points in order to show trends over a period of time.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 12) Which of the following charts displays lines connecting data points to show trends over equal time periods?

A) Column chart B) Bar chart C) Line chart D) Area chart Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 13) A pie chart: A) shows a relationship between two variables.

B) separates one or more pie slices from the rest of the pie chart.

C) emphasizes magnitude of changes over time by filling in the space between lines with a color.

D) shows each data point in proportion to the whole data series as a slice in a circular pie.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 14) An X Y (scatter) chart shows: A) values as percentages of the whole but may contain more than one data series.

B) the high and low close prices for individual stocks over equal amounts of time.

C) the trend of two variables using a minimum of two dimensions on a continuous line.

D) a relationship between two variables.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 15) A chart sheet: A) is a label that describes the chart.

B) enables you to adjust the size of a chart.

C) contains a single chart and no spreadsheet data.

D) is a miniature chart contained in a single cell.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

16) How can you identify sizing handles when you click a chart?

A) A Sizing Handles button displays on the Design tab.

B) A Sizing Handles button displays next to the chart.

C) They display as small, black triangles located on the corners of a selected chart.

D) They display as small, white-filled squares.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 17) Axes titles are: A) display on the X-axis by default.

B) the value or name of a data point on the X-axis.

C) not displayed by default.

D) descriptive labels that show exact values or name of a data point.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 18) A data label is: A) a visual representation of numerical data.

B) the value or name of a data point.

C) a line used to depict trends and forecast future data.

D) a horizontal or vertical line that extends from the horizontal or vertical axis through the plot area.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 19) Gridlines on a chart in Excel 2013 are: A) numeric values that describe a single value on a chart.

B) lines used to depict trends and forecast future data.

C) horizontal or vertical lines that span across the chart.

D) a visual representation of numerical data.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 20) A(n) ________ is a key that identifies the color, gradient, picture, texture, or pattern of each data series in a chart.

A) label B) trendline C) legend D) axis Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

21) Which of the following is NOT a task pane in Excel 2013 used to format a chart?

A) Format Chart Area B) Format Plot Area C) Format Data Series D) Format Titles and Axes Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 22) Which of the following is NOT controlled by choosing a chart style?

A) Color of the chart area B) Sparklines C) Plot area D) Data series Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 23) Which of the following is NOT a style that affects the look of a data series?

A) Flat B) Stacked C) 3-D D) Beveled Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 24) The Chart Styles button is: A) located on the right side of a chart.

B) located on the left side of a chart.

C) is accessed from the Insert tab.

D) on the Format tab.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 25) The ________ group on the Design tab is useful for adjusting the data source of a chart.

A) Chart Styles B) Current Selection C) Data D) Chart Layouts Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Modify the data source

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

26) A chart filter in Excel 2013: A) controls which charts are printed and which are visible on the screen of a workbook.

B) controls which data series and categories are visible in a chart.

C) displays a list of all charts in a workbook in order to select which charts you want to print.

D) displays all chart types and filters that are available for the data you want to present.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Modify the data source 27) Where does a sparkline display?

A) In a single cell B) On a separate worksheet from the data C) In a range below the data D) Always to the right of the data Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 28) Which of the following is NOT a type of sparkline?

A) Bar B) Line C) Column D) Win/loss Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 29) Which of the following is FALSE about sparklines?

A) Sparklines do not include an axis label.

B) Sparklines display in a single cell.

C) Sparklines include an automatically-created chart title.

D) Sparklines present a condensed, simple visual illustration of data.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 30) To begin creating sparklines on a worksheet, click the ________ tab.

A) Insert B) Design C) Chart Tools Design D) Format Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

31) Before you create a chart, you should delete any blank rows or columns in the primary data set from which you will create a chart.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select the data source 32) When you update data in a worksheet, you must press F9 to update the data in the associated chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 33) A column chart is most effective with four to eight categories that display.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 34) Excel 2013 automatically assigns a different pattern to each column of a clustered column chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 35) A bar chart is one of the most common types of charts used in Excel.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 36) A disadvantage of a stacked column chart is that the segments within each column do not start at the same point.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 37) By default, Excel inserts a chart on its own chart sheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 38) Sizing handles display as small, black-filled circles to resize a chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

39) Excel creates a chart on the same worksheet as the original data, but you can move the chart to its own chart sheet in the workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 40) Default chart sheet names include sheet1, sheet2, etc.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 41) A chart can be resized from the Format tab.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 42) If you embedded a chart on the same sheet as the data source, you cannot print the chart only.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 43) Axes, chart titles, and data tables are examples of chart elements.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 44) A gridline is a line used to depict trends and forecast future data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 45) Excel includes the placeholder text Chart Title below a chart when you create the chart.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 46) Excel automatically determines the starting, incremental, and stopping values on a chart based on the data selected.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 47) Pie charts often include percentage data labels.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

48) When you create a pie chart, Excel does not create a legend.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 49) Displaying too much label content in a chart can clutter the chart.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 50) A specific chart style controls the color of the chart area as well as the plot area.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 51) You can change the color scheme of a chart by clicking the Chart Styles button.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 52) A chart filter controls which data series and categories are visible on a chart in Excel.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Modify the data source 53) You can switch data used in a chart to create the horizontal axis and the legend.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Modify the data source 54) A column sparkline could compare averages of prices or averages of test scores.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 55) The purpose of a sparkline is to present a complex chart on a full chart sheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 56) The ________ of a chart is the region containing the graphical representation of the values in a data series.

Answer: plot area Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Select the data source 9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

57) The ________ of a chart is a horizontal border that provides a frame of reference for measuring data horizontally.

Answer: X-axis Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 58) The ________ of a chart is a key that identifies each data series of the chart.

Answer: legend Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 59) A(n) ________ label is text that describes a collection of data points in a chart.

Answer: category Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Select the data source 60) In Excel 2013, Excel displays the ________ button in the bottom-right corner of a highlighted range.

Answer: Quick Analysis Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 61) A(n) ________ chart displays a proportion of individual data points to the sum of all points.

Answer: pie Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 62) A(n) ________ chart displays values vertically where the height represents the value.

Answer: column Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 63) A(n) ________ column chart compares groups of columns set side by side for easy display.

Answer: clustered Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 64) A(n) ________ chart is a derivative of a scatter chart in which both axes are value axes.

Answer: bubble Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 65) ________ are small white-filled squares that display when a chart is selected.

Answer: Sizing handles Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

66) To move a chart from one sheet to another, click the ________ tab and click Move Chart.

Answer: Design Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 67) A(n) ________ is a worksheet that contains only a chart.

Answer: chart sheet Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 68) To print only a chart, select the chart, click the ________ tab, and click Print.

Answer: File Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 69) Excel creates charts on the same worksheet as the original data set, but you can ________ the chart to its own chart sheet.

Answer: move Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 70) A default chart sheet is named ________.

Answer: Chart1 Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 71) A(n) ________ is a grid that contains the data source values and labels.

Answer: data table Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 72) A(n) ________ is a key that identifies the color, gradient, picture, texture, or pattern assigned to each data series.

Answer: legend Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 73) A(n) ________ is a line used to depict trends and forecast future data.

Answer: trendline Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 74) A chart ________ is the label that describes the entire chart; it should reflect the purpose of the chart.

Answer: title Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

75) When you hover the mouse pointer over a chart, Excel 2013 display a(n) ________ with the name of that chart element.

Answer: ScreenTip Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 76) ________ Styles add artistic style, text fill, and text effects to an object.

Answer: WordArt Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 77) Applying a chart ________ allows you to change any number of formatting options such as the color of the chart area, the data, series, and the plot area.

Answer: style Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 78) A chart ________ controls which data series and categories are visible in a chart.

Answer: filter Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Modify the data source 79) Sparklines can be created by clicking the ________ tab.

Answer: Insert Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 80) The ________ group on the Sparkline Tools Design tab allows you to change the selected sparkline type.

Answer: Type Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. Chart II. Data point III. Data series IV. Category label V. Column chart A. displays data comparisons vertically in columns B. group of related data points C. numeric value that describes a single value on a chart D. visual representation of numerical data E. text that describes a collection of data points in a chart Answer: D, C, B, E, A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 82) Match the chart elements to their meanings: I. Chart area II. Plot Area III. X-axis IV. Y-axis V. Category axis A. contains a graphical representation of values in a data series B. provides descriptive group names for subdividing a data series C. horizontal line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference D. vertical line that borders the plot area to provide a frame of reference E. contains an entire chart and all of its elements Answer: E, A, C, D, B Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 83) Match the following descriptions to their type of chart: I. compares groups set side by side II. single data series III. multiple data series IV. each data series in different line color V. relationship of individual data points to the whole A Bar chart B. Stacked column chart C. Clustered column chart D. Pie chart E. Line chart Answer: C, D, A, E, B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

84) Match the chart type to their description: I. Pie chart II. Exploded pie chart III. Area chart IV. X Y (scatter) chart V. Stock chart A. separates one or more slices from the whole B. shows each data point in proportion to the whole data series C. shows relationship between two variables D. shows open, high, low, close, and volume prices E. emphasizes magnitude of changes over time by filling in the space between lines with a color Answer: B, A, E, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 85) Match the chart type to their description: I. Surface chart II. Doughnut chart III. Bubble chart IV. Radar chart V. Bar chart A. derivative of a scatter chart B. uses each category as a spoke C. compares values horizontally across categories D. similar to a topographic map E. derivative of a pie chart Answer: D, E, A, B, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 86) Match the Sparkline Tools Design tab groups to their descriptions: I. Group group II. Style group III. Show group IV. Type group V. Sparkline group A. displays high points or markers within a sparkline B. edits the location and data source for a group or individual data point C. changes the selected sparkline type D. specifies the horizontal and vertical axis settings E. changes sparkline color or marker color Answer: D, E, A, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines 14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

87) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. Chart element II. Chart style III. Embedded object IV. Chart1 V. Chart sheet A. collection of formatting that controls the color of a data series, chart area, or plot area B. chart on a worksheet C. chart placed in a separate worksheet D. default chart sheet name E. component that completes or helps to clarify a chart Answer: E, A, B, D, C Diff: 3 Objective: Multiple objectives 88) Match the following tab or buttons to their meanings: I. Design tab II. Chart Elements button III. Quick Analysis button IV. Chart Styles button V. Chart Filter button A. contains the Chart Styles group B. used to change the design of a chart C. can change the position of the title of a chart, for example D. indicates a data series or category displayed in a chart E. enables you to use tools to quickly examine data Answer: A, C, E, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 89) Match the following descriptions to their meanings: I. Chart sheet II. Sizing handles III. Chart filter IV. Chart style V. Chart title A. worksheet that contains only a single chart B. collection of formatting for charts C. small, white-filled squares that display when a chart is selected D. label that describes an entire chart E. controls which data series and categories are visible in a chart Answer: A, C, E, B, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

90) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. Chart title II. Axis title III. Data label IV. Gridline V. Trendline A. value or name of a data point B. label that describes either the category axis or the value axis C. label that describes a chart D. line used to depict trends and forecast future data E. line that extends from the horizontal or vertical axis through the plot area Answer: C, B, A, E, D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 91) Describe the difference between an X-axis and a Y-axis.

Answer: The X-axis of a chart is a horizontal border that provides a frame of reference for measuring data horizontally. The Y-axis is a vertical border that provides a frame of reference for measuring data vertically. Excel refers to the axes as the category axis and value axis.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select the data source 92) When you select a range of cells and hover the mouse over the selected range, what happens in Excel 2013?

Answer: The Quick Analysis button in the bottom-right corner of the selection displays. The Quick Analysis tool enables you to use tools such as charts to quickly examine data. The Quick Analysis button also displays recommended charts based on the selected range.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 93) Describe a column chart and the suggested limits of this type of chart.

Answer: A column chart displays data vertically in columns and compares values across different categories. The height of each column represents the value of individual data points.

Column charts are most effective when they are limited to seven or fewer categories or the columns will likely appear too close together, making it difficult to read the labels.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 94) When might you want to create an X Y (scatter) chart? What type of data might be best suited for a this type of chart?

Answer: When you want to show a relationship between two numerical variables using the X and Y coordinates, an X Y chart may be appropriate. Excel plots one variable on the horizontal X-axis and the other variable on the vertical Y-axis. Scatter charts are often used to represent data in educational, scientific, and medical experiments.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Choose a chart type 16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) What is a chart sheet and what are its limitations?

Answer: A chart sheet is a worksheet that contains a single chart only. You cannot enter data or formulas on a chart sheet. If you want to print or view only a full-sized chart, no data or formulas, place the chart on its own chart sheet.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Move, size, and print a chart 96) Describe the display of horizontal axis and vertical axis titles on a chart.

Answer: If you add a horizontal axis title to a chart, it displays below the category labels. If you add a vertical axis titles, it displays as a rotated title on the left side of the value axis.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Add chart elements 97) Describe the three Format task panes that allows you to format with fill and border elements of a chart.

Answer: The Format Chart Area pane can be used to add fill to a chart area--color, a picture, texture, or a pattern. The Format Plot area allows you to add a border on a chart that is a solid line or a gradient line. The Format Data series pane also allows you to add a solid fill, gradient fill, or picture or texture fill to individual data series in a chart.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Format chart elements 98) When choosing an appropriate chart style, what should you consider?

Answer: An appropriate chart style should complement the chart data and also be easy to read.

Also, consider whether you will display the chart onscreen or print the chart. If you will display the chart in a presentation, consider selecting a style with a black background.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Apply a chart style and colors 99) What does a chart filter do?

Answer: A chart filter controls which data series and categories are visible in a chart. By default, all data you select to create a chart are used to construct the data series and categories. When you apply a chart filter, you can hide extraneous data.

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Modify the data source 100) Describe the three types of sparklines available in Excel 2013 and how each may be useful.

Answer: A line sparkline shows trends over time, such as each student's trends in test scores. A column sparkline compares test averages. A win/loss sparkline depicts how many points a team won or lost each game.

Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create and customize sparklines

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 4 Datasets and Tables: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) Which of the following is not a Freeze Panes option?

A) Freeze Top Row B) Freeze First Column C) Freeze Headings D) Freeze Panes Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets 2) If you want to freeze the first three rows and the first two columns, you would select cell ________ and then click Freeze Panes.

A) B3 B) C3 C) B4 D) C4 Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets 3) In Page Break Preview, manual page breaks are indicated by ________ lines.

A) solid blue B) dashed blue C) solid red D) dashed red Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

4)

In the figure shown above, the white area identified as Page 1 indicates a ________.

A) frozen pane B) page pane C) print area D) print mask Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets 5) Which of the following is NOT an advantage of an Excel table over a range of data?

A) Rows can be added and deleted.

B) Column headings remain on screen without having to use Freeze Panes.

C) Filter arrows are available for sorting and filtering.

D) Table styles can format table rows and columns with complementary fill colors.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Excel Tables 6) Each record in a table is represented by a ________.

A) data set B) legend C) column D) row Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Excel Tables

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

7)

The figure shown above depicts the ________.

A) Table Themes Gallery B) Table Styles Gallery C) Table Themes Palette D) Table Styles Palette Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Excel Tables 8)

The figure shown above depicts the ________.

A) Arrange Menu B) Arrange Dialog box C) Sort Menu D) Sort Dialog box Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Table Manipulation 9) A(n) ________ is used to specify conditions that determine which records are displayed.

A) funnel B) filter C) structured reference D) icon set Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Table Manipulation 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Which of the following is NOT a filter type?

A) text B) formula C) number D) date Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Table Manipulation 11) Structured references are surrounded by ________.

A) single quotation marks ' ' B) parentheses ( ) C) brackets [ ] D) braces { } Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Table Aggregation 12) Functions such as SUM and MAX be used in a ________, which appears below the last row of records in a table.

A) structured reference B) total row C) filter D) PivotChart Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Table Aggregation 13) You can use ________ to highlight or emphasize cells that meet a specific condition.

A) filtering B) conditional formatting C) structured referencing D) sorting Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Conditional Formatting

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

14)

The objects accompanying the numbers in the last column shown above are ________.

A) area charts B) surface graphs C) sparklines D) data bars Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Conditional Formatting 15) If you have a table containing sales data, you could use ________ rules to identify the three highest sales transactions.

A) Maximum/Minimum B) Top/Bottom C) High/Low D) Extremes Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Conditional Formatting 16) In Page Break Preview, automatic page breaks are indicated by solid blue lines.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets 17) If an automatic page break occurs at an unwanted location, you can adjust it by inserting a manual page break.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Large Datasets 18) To remove a row from a table, select the row and press Delete.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Excel Tables 19) You can delete duplicate rows using Remove Duplicates.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Excel Tables 5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Tables can only be sorted on a single field.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Table Manipulation 21) indicates that a field has been sorted.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Table Manipulation 22) =[Amount]-[Down_Pay] is an example of conditional formatting.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: Table Aggregation 23) Before converting a range to a table, you should make a copy of the worksheet, since you CANNOT convert a table back into a range.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: Table Aggregation 24) When using Highlight Cell Rules on cells containing names, you would use the Text that Contains option.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 5: Conditional Formatting 25) A data bar is a bar whose width represents a cell's value compared to the other cells' values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 5: Conditional Formatting

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 4 Datasets and Tables: Managing Large Volumes of Data 1) In Excel 2013 a dataset: A) indicates where data starts on a new printed page.

B) is a collection of structured, related data in columns and rows.

C) is a grouping of similarly formatted worksheets.

D) is a grouping of worksheets with similar content.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 2) Freezing rows and/or columns: A) collects structured, related data in columns and rows.

B) keeps them visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

C) keeps all worksheets on the screen.

D) enables you to adjust settings to control how the worksheet will print.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 3) The Freeze Panes option keeps: A) only the first column visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

B) both rows and columns above and to the left of the active cell visible as you scroll.

C) only the designated rows visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

D) all row names and column headings on the screen for preparation in printing.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 4) The Freeze Top Row option: A) is the sequence in which pages print.

B) enables you to adjust settings to control how the worksheet will print.

C) defines the range of data to print.

D) keeps only the top row visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 5) Which of the following is NOT an option on the Page Layout tab?

A) Manage page breaks B) Set the print area C) Print titles D) Print preview Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) A page break: A) indicates which worksheet is set to print.

B) is the sequence in which pages print.

C) indicates where data starts on a new printed page.

D) stops the printer from printing.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 7) Which of the following shows where automatic page breaks will occur in a worksheet?

A) By solid blue lines B) By dotted red lines C) By blue dashed lines D) By solid black lines Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 8) How are manual page breaks indicated in a worksheet?

A) By solid blue lines B) By dotted red lines C) By blue dashed lines D) By solid black lines Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 9) Which of the following is TRUE about the print area feature?

A) In Page Break Preview, the area of the worksheet that won't be printed has a dark blue background.

B) In Page Break Preview, the print area has a white background and dashed red border.

C) The print area can be cleared from the Home tab.

D) The print area defines the range of data to print.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 10) Print order: A) represents a Field which is an individual piece of data.

B) is the sequence in which pages print.

C) represents a record.

D) is the command to print in Excel 2013.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) What is a field?

A) A complete set of data for an entity B) Indicates where data starts on a new worksheet C) An individual piece of data, such as an address D) All data about one specific item Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 12) Each column in a table: A) needs to be converted to a range in order to work with it.

B) represents a record.

C) is a complete set of data for an entity.

D) represents a field which can contain an individual piece of data for a record.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 13) What is a record?

A) An individual piece of data, such as a last name B) Defines the range of data to print C) A complete set of data for an entity D) All data within one full column Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 14) Each row in an Excel table: A) is an individual piece of data, such as a last name.

B) is the sequence in which pages print.

C) represents a Field which can contain an individual piece of data for a record.

D) represents a record.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 15) To create a table from an existing range of data: A) click within the range, click the Table Tools Design tab, and then select Convert to Table.

B) select any cell in the worksheet then click Existing Range in the Tools group.

C) click in a cell and on the Home tab, click the Insert arrow in the Cells group.

D) click the Insert tab and then click Table in the Tables group.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

16) A Table style controls: A) check boxes to select format actions such as Total Row. B) check boxes to select format actions such as Header Row. C) the fill color of the header row and rows of records.

D) the background and watermarks of a worksheet.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 17) Which of the following is NOT included in the Table Style Options group?

A) Footer Row B) Last Column C) Banded Columns D) Filter Button Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 18) ________ displays alternate fill colors for even and odd rows to help distinguish fields.

A) Filtered rows B) Banded columns C) First/Last columns D) Banded rows Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 19) Which of the following is NOT a Table Style option?

A) Subtotal Row B) Filter Button C) First Column D) Banded Rows Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 20) Sorting arranges records in a table by: A) using filter arrows.

B) the row number.

C) the value in field(s) within a table.

D) permanently removing extraneous data.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Sort data

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

21) Sorting dates oldest to newest: A) is the process of displaying only records that meet specific conditions.

B) arranges dates in alphabetical order.

C) is a Text filter.

D) displays data in chronological order.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Sort data 22) Sorting values smallest to largest: A) arranges names in sequential order.

B) arranges numbers in sequential order.

C) arranges dates in alphabetical order.

D) is the process of displaying only records that meet specific conditions.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Sort data 23) Excel enables you to sort data on ________ different levels.

A) 116 B) 18 C) 256 D) 64 Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Sort data 24) Filtering: A) helps to remove duplicate data in a dataset.

B) displays data in chronological order.

C) is the process of displaying only records that meet special conditions.

D) arranges dates in alphabetical order.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Filter data 25) Filtering the First_Name field to display only records that begin with the letter J uses a: A) field.

B) sort filter.

C) text Filter.

D) conditional filter.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Filter data

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

26) A structured reference: A) is a tag or use of a table element, such as a field heading.

B) highlights or emphasizes cells that meet certain conditions.

C) is a table element that uses relative references in a formula within a table.

D) formats cells based upon their value in reference to the value of other cells.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 27) A total row appears as the last row of a table to: A) highlight or emphasize cells that meet certain conditions.

B) format cells based upon their value in reference to the value of other cells.

C) tag a table element as a reference in a formula.

D) display summary statistics, such as a sum.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 28) Top/Bottom Rules: A) is a horizontal gradient or solid fill indicating the cell's relative value compared to other selected cells.

B) moves data from the top of the workbook to the bottom for analysis.

C) highlight cells meeting specified criteria with a specified color, font, or border.

D) format cells based upon their value in relation to the value of other cells.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 29) A color scale: A) highlights cells meeting specified criteria with a specified color, font, or border.

B) is a conditional format that displays an colored icon representing a value in the top third, quarter, or fifth based on colors in the selected range.

C) calculates an aggregate for values in a range or database.

D) is a conditional format that displays a color based on the relative value of the cell contents.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 30) In addition to sorting and filtering cells by content you can sort and/or filter by: A) Top/Bottom rules.

B) conditional formatting.

C) icon sets.

D) the data bar.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

31) Press F6 to display the Go To dialog box.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 32) Freeze Panes only locks columns above the active cell as you scroll through a worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 33) Unfreeze Panes only appears on the menu when you have frozen rows and/or columns.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 34) A page break indicates where the end of all the columns (fields) occurs.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 35) If the automatic page breaks occur in undesirable locations, you can adjust the page breaks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 36) In Page Break Preview, the print area has a white background with a dotted blue border.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 37) You can create a table by selecting a range, clicking the Quick Analysis button, and clicking Tables.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 38) Default column headings of a table are Column1, Column2, and so on.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 39) After you have created a table, you cannot add new fields to it.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Design and create tables

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

40) Tables provide advantages over regular ranges but you cannot convert a table back to a regular range of data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 41) A table style controls the fill color of header rows.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 42) Table Styles use Live Preview.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 43) Banded Rows display alternate fill colors for every five sets of rows to distinguish records.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 44) Text can be sorted A to Z or Z to A. Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Sort data 45) You can sort data by one or more columns.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Sort data 46) You can only apply one filter to a large dataset in Excel 2013.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Filter data 47) You can apply text, value, and date filters to fields based on the data in a particular field.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Filter data 48) Semiselection cannot be used to create formulas in a table.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

49) A structured reference uses field names instead of cell references to make it easier to create formulas.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 50) A structured reference requires parentheses around column headings or field names.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 51) With data arranged in a table, you can display a total row after the last record. Excel sums the values in the last column automatically Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 52) Conditional formatting is the process of conditioning data to make it more manageable.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 53) When you no longer need conditional formatting, you can clear it for a selected range or for an entire worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 54) If the default conditional format options do not provide what you need, you can create your own rule for formatting.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a new rule 55) In Excel 2013, you can delete conditional formatting rules that you create but you cannot edit them.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a new rule 56) Function key ________ accesses the Go To command in Excel.

Answer: F5 Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

57) ________ keeps rows and/or columns visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

Answer: Freezing Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 58) To keep columns and/or rows on the screen and visible, use the Windows group on the View Tab , and then click ________ Panes.

Answer: Freeze Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 59) In a worksheet, it is possible to ________ a manual page break to a new, desired location.

Answer: drag Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 60) A page ________ indicates where data starts on a new printed page.

Answer: break Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 61) A(n) ________ defines the range of data from a worksheet to print.

Answer: print area Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 62) Print ________ is the sequence in which pages of a workbook are printed.

Answer: order Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 63) A(n) ________ is an area in the worksheet that contains rows and columns of related data formatted to enable data management and analysis.

Answer: table Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 64) A(n) ________ is a space for an individual piece of data within a record, such as a street name.

Answer: field Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 65) Each ________ in an Excel table represents a record.

Answer: row Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

66) To create a(n) ________ from an existing range of data, click the Insert tab and then click Table in the Tables group.

Answer: table Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 67) To ________ a table into a range, click within the table, click the Table Tools Design tab, and from the Tools group, select Convert to Range.

Answer: convert Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 68) Click the ________ tab and click Remove Duplicates to open the Remove Duplicates dialog box.

Answer: Data Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 69) ________ displays alternate fill colors for even and odd rows to help distinguish fields.

Answer: Banded Rows Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 70) The ________ Table Style option applies a different format to the first column of a table so that the row headings stand out.

Answer: First Column Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 71) The ________ Table Style option displays the field names of a table when checked.

Answer: Header Row Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 72) ________ arranges records in a table by the value in the field or fields within a table.

Answer: Sorting Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Sort data 73) Sorting by ________ arranges data together for cells containing a particular fill or font color.

Answer: color Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Sort data

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

74) Filtering the Last_Name field to show only records that begin with the letter P is an application of a(n) ________ filter.

Answer: Text Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Filter data 75) The use of field headings without row references in a structured formula is called a(n) ________ reference.

Answer: unqualified Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 76) A(n) ________ structured reference is a structured formula that includes references, such as table numbers.

Answer: fully qualified Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 77) A(n) ________ row appears as the last row of a table to display summary statistics, such as a sum.

Answer: total Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 78) The calculations on a total row in a table use the ________ function.

Answer: SUBTOTAL or Subtotal Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 79) A(n) ________ bar is a horizontal gradient or solid fill indicating the cell's relative value compared to other selected cells.

Answer: data Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 80) In addition to sorting and filtering cells by content, you can sort and/or filter by ________ formatting.

Answer: conditional Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create a new rule

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) Match the first part of the sentence with the last part of the sentence: I. A dataset is II. Freezing keeps rows and/or columns III. Freeze Top Row IV. A manual page break V. An automatic page break A. structured, related data in columns and rows.

B. appears as a blue dashed line.

C. visible as you scroll through a worksheet.

D. appears as a solid blue line.

E. keeps the top row visible as you scroll.

Answer: A, C, E, D, B Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 82) Match the first part of the sentence with the last part of the sentence: I. A print area II. Print order III. A table IV. A field V. A record A. is a complete set of data for an entity.

B. is a set of formatted rows and columns of data.

C. defines the range of data to print.

D. is the sequence in which pages print.

E. is an individual piece of data.

Answer: C, D, B, E, A Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives 83) Match the tab name to the feature available on that tab: I. Home tab II. View tab III. Page Layout tab IV. File tab V. Insert tab A. Print B. Freeze Panes C. Go To D. Breaks E. Table Answer: C, B, D, A, E Diff: 3 Objective: Multiple objectives 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

84) Match the first part of the sentence with the last part of the sentence: I. A row in an Excel table II. Creating a table from existing data in a range III. Converting a table back into a range IV. Adding a record to a table V. Adding a field to a table A. increases the number of columns.

B. increases the number of rows.

C. restores Range tools.

D. enables unique table tools.

E. represents a record.

Answer: E, D, C, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 85) Match the sort options to their explanations: I. Table style controls II. Table Style Options group III. Sorting Text A to Z IV. Sorting Dates oldest to newest V. Sorting Values smallest to largest A. check boxes to select format actions B. fill color of the header row, columns, and records in a table C. arranges data in alphabetical order D. arranges numbers in sequential order E. displays data in chronological order Answer: B, A, C, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Filter data

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

86) Match the filter options to their explanations: I. Filtering II. Top 10 option III. Custom Filter IV. Duplicate Values V. Sorting A. specify a number or percentage of records to display B. arranges records in a table by the value C. conditional formatting that displays doubled cells D. displays only records that meet conditions E. complex filtering requirements Answer: D, A, E, C, B Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives 87) Match the following terms to their descriptions: I. Structured reference II. Total row III. SUBTOTAL function IV. Conditional formatting V. Sum, average, min, max A. Highlights or emphasizes cells that meet certain conditions B. Statistical functions C. Tag or use of a table element as a reference in a formula D. Calculates aggregate values in a range or database E. Last row of a table to display summary statistics Answer: C, E, D, A, B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 88) Match the conditional formatting options to their descriptions: I. Highlight Cells Rules II. Top Bottom Rules III. Data bar IV. Color scale V. Icon set A. formats cells based on the value in relation to the other cells B. horizontal gradient or solid fill indicating a cell's relative value C. highlights cells meeting criteria with a color, font, or border D. conditional format that displays a particular color based on the relative value of a cell E. conditional format that displays a small image representing a value Answer: C, A, B, D, E Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting 15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

89) Match the following terms to their descriptions: I. Structured reference II. Unqualified reference III. Fully qualified structured reference IV. Top/Bottom Rules V. Conditional formatting A. tag or use of a table element as a reference in a formula B. type of conditional formatting C. applies special formats or highlights or emphasis to cells D. structured formula that includes references E. use of field headings without row references in a structured formula Answer: A, E, D, B, C Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 90) Match the following items to their descriptions: I. F5 II. Press Ctrl+Home with frozen panes III. Press Ctrl+Home without frozen panes IV. Solid blue lines V. Blue dashed lines on a worksheet A. cell A1 B. first unfrozen cell C. Go To command D. Automatic page breaks E. Manual page breaks Answer: C, B, A, E, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 91) Why might you want to freeze rows or columns in a large dataset?

Answer: When you scroll to parts of a dataset not initially visible, some rows and columns disappear from view. Freezing rows and/or columns keeps the frozen rows and/or columns visible onscreen at all times when scrolling through a large dataset.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns 92) When you freeze panes and press Ctrl+Home when columns A and B and row 1 are frozen, what happens?

Answer: In this case, cell C2 becomes the active cell since when you freeze panes and press Ctrl+Home, the first unfrozen cell is the active cell instead of A1.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Freeze rows and columns

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) How can you identify the difference between automatic page breaks on a worksheet and manual page breaks?

Answer: Blue dashed lines indicate where automatic page breaks occur, and solid blue lines indicate manual page breaks.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Print large datasets 94) If you have a table that extends to row 21 and you start typing in row 22, what happens?

Answer: Excel will extend the table to include that new row as a record in the table and will apply consistent formatting.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Design and create tables 95) What do banded rows and banded columns do in an Excel table?

Answer: Banded rows display alternate fill colors for even and odd rows to help distinguish records. Banded columns display alternate fill colors for even and odd columns to help distinguish fields.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Apply a table style 96) What are the four types of sorts in Excel 2013?

Answer: There are Text, Dates, Values, and Color sorts in Excel 2013.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Sort data 97) What options are available in the Top 10 AutoFilter dialog box?

Answer: You can select either Top or Bottom, click the spin arrows to indicate a value, and then click the last arrow to select either Items or Percent.

Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Filter data 98) What are two built-in functionality features in tables in Excel 2013 that assist in creating formulas?

Answer: Structured references, a tag or use of a table element, and a total row are built-in functions of Excel 2013 tables. These features assist you in building understandable formulas.

Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Use structured references and a total row 99) What are icon sets?

Answer: Icon sets are symbols or signs that classify data into three, four, or five categories, based on the values in a range. Icon sets are a type of conditional formatting in Excel.

Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Apply conditional formatting

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) What are the areas of the New Formatting Rule dialog box that need to be selected to create a new rule?

Answer: First, you select a rule type. With the rule type selected, you can specify the format style. You can then specify the minimum and maximum values, the fill colors for color sets or data bars, or the icons for icon sets.

Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create a new rule

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 5 Subtotals, PivotTables, and PivotCharts: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) You can use a maximum of ________ numbered button(s) in addition to the + and - buttons to expand and collapse an outline.

A) one B) two C) three D) four Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: Subtotals and Outlines 2) To apply an outline to columns, you must ________ the desired columns.

A) cluster B) group C) aggregate D) condense Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Subtotals and Outlines 3) A(n) ________ allows you to summarize and examine data such as analyzing book sales by categories.

A) PowerPivot B) Table Analysis C) PivotTable D) Aggregate Analysis Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: PivotTable Basics 4) Which of the following is NOT an area used when creating a PivotTable?

A) COLUMNS B) TABLES C) ROWS D) VALUES Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: PivotTable Basics

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) ________ is used to exclude particular categories or values from a PivotTable.

A) Mining B) Grouping C) Outlining D) Filtering Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: PivotTable Options.

6) A ________ is a series of buttons that allows users to filter a PivotTable.

A) PivotChart B) slicer C) PowerPivot D) data mine Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: PivotTable Options.

7) Slicer styles are located on the ________ tab.

A) VIEW B) INSERT C) DESIGN D) OPTIONS Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: PivotTable Options.

8) PivotTable styles are located on the ________ tab.

A) DESIGN B) ANALYZE C) INSERT D) OPTIONS Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: PivotTable Design and PivotCharts 9) A ________ is used to graphically represent the data in a PivotTable.

A) PivotChart B) PowerPivot C) Scatter Chart D) PivotGraph Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: PivotTable Design and PivotCharts

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) You can use subtotals in a dataset to calculate subtotals of groups such as sales of books within a discipline.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Subtotals and Outlines 11) To properly have two levels of subtotals, you must subtotal the secondary category first and then add a subtotal for your primary category.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Subtotals and Outlines 12) You can move a field from one PivotTable area to another by just dragging it.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: PivotTable Basics 13) To remove a field from a PivotTable, you select it and press Delete.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: PivotTable Basics 14) Changes made to the original worksheet are automatically reflected in the PivotTable.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: PivotTable Basics 15) When creating a calculated field in a PivotTable, range names and cell references outside the PivotTable CANNOT be used.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: PivotTable Options.

16) Changes made to a PivotChart are automatically reflected in the corresponding PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: PivotTable Design and PivotCharts

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 5 Subtotals, PivotTables, and PivotCharts 1) Which of the following is not a calculation that can be completed with the SUBTOTAL function?

A) Average B) Count C) Min D) Index Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 2) When using subtotal, what does the 4th button of the outline levels do?

A) Collapses the outline to display the grand total only B) Displays subtotals by the main subtotal category and the grand total C) Displays the entire list D) Displays subtotals by the main subtotal category, the secondary subtotal category, and the grand total Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 3) Which of the following tools is best suited for maximum control when creating an outline?

A) Subtotals B) PivotTable C) Grouping D) Slicers Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data 4) Which of the following tools is best suited for data mining and summarizing data?

A) Subtotal B) PivotTable C) Column chart D) Data table Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Which of the following is not true about PivotTables?

A) PivotTables are dynamic B) PivotTables can arrange data in columns or rows C) PivotTables can summarize data D) PivotTables can Auto Refresh data Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 6) From which of the following locations can you create a PivotTable?

A) Data tab B) Quick Analysis gallery C) Backstage D) Formulas tab Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a PivotChart 7) Which of the following tools is best suited for complex cross referenced subtotals?

A) PivotTable B) Subtotal C) Data table D) Outline Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 8) Where is the command to insert a PivotTable located in the Ribbon?

A) Data tab B) Insert tab C) Formulas tab D) Developer tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 9) When editing a PivotTable where are values field settings edited?

A) PivotTable Design tab B) Data tab C) PivotTable Fields task pane D) Formulas tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) What does the Filters Area of a PivotTable do?

A) Subdivides data into one or more additional categories B) Filters the data to display results based on particular conditions you set C) Organizes and groups data into categories on the left side. Each group name occupies a single row D) Displays summary statistics, such as totals or averages Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 11) What does the Values Area of a PivotTable do?

A) Subdivides data into one or more additional categories B) Filters the data to display results based on particular conditions you set C) Organizes and groups data into categories on the left side. Each group name occupies a single row D) Displays summary statistics, such as totals or averages Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 12) Which of the following options is the best tool when using a PivotTable that contains more data than you currently need?

A) Sorting B) Removing a value field C) Filtering D) Refreshing the data Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 13) Which is the best tool for managing multiple filters within a PivotTable?

A) Slicers B) Refreshing the data C) PivotChart D) Sorting Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 14) What does a slicer caption do?

A) Provides feedback on slicers that are engaged B) Provides access to slicer options C) Displays text in the header at the top of the slicer window D) Creates caption meta data Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) What is the best option for adding a calculation to a PivotTable that does not already exist?

A) Custom function B) Calculated field C) Function D) PivotTool Calculation Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 16) Which of the following calculations cannot be completed with subtotal?

A) Average B) Standard Deviation C) Sum D) Max Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 17) When setting custom calculation options in a PivotTable, what does % of Parent Row Total calculate?

A) Displays each value as a percentage of the grand total B) Displays each value as a percentage of the respective column total. The values in each column total 100% C) Displays each value as a percentage of the respective row total. The values in each row total 100% D) Displays values as: (value for the item) / (value for the parent item on rows) Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 18) When setting custom calculation options in a PivotTable, what does Running Total calculate?

A) Displays each value as a percentage of the grand total B) Displays each value as a percentage of the respective column total. The values in each column total 100% C) Displays values as running totals D) Displays values as: (value for the item) / (value for the parent item on rows) Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

19) Which of the following is not a benefit of PowerPivot?

A) Import data from multiple sources B) Create relationships C) Create web queries D) Maintain connections Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 20) What is the best PowerPivot tool when attempting to link to tables with a common related field?

A) Pivot B) Relationships C) Links D) External references Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 21) Which of the following is not true about a PivotChart?

A) They function independently from the PivotTable B) They can be formatted similar to a regular chart C) They update as the PivotTable updates D) They can be placed on a separate worksheet Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a PivotChart 22) Where is the Subtotal command located on the Ribbon?

A) Insert tab B) Data tab C) View tab D) Backstage Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 23) How are grouped columns ungrouped?

A) Select the entire worksheet and click Ungroup in the Subtotal group B) Select one cell in the grouped columns and click Ungroup in the Outline group C) Select all grouped columns and click Ungroup in the Outline group D) Right-click and select Ungroup Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

24) Which of the following is not true regarding data mining?

A) Analyzes large amounts of data B) Uses advanced statistical techniques C) Identifies trends D) Exports data Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 25) Which of the following is not one of the rules regarding good table design?

A) Use meaningful column labels B) Ensure data accuracy C) Avoid blank rows D) Insert rows to separate data Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 26) Which of the following tools is best suited to analyze the most productive students in a school district over a period of time?

A) PivotTable B) Subtotal C) Pie Chart D) Slicer Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 27) Which of the following is the best tool for analyzing employee performance over a period of time?

A) Data table B) PivotTable C) Subtotals D) Outline Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 28) What is the name of the tab that appears in the Ribbon when a PivotTable is selected?

A) PivotTable Options B) PivotTable C) PivotTable Tools D) Analysis Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

29) Which of the following appears in the PivotTable Fields task pane?

A) Choose fields to add to report B) Filter area C) Plot area D) Rows area Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 30) Which of the following is not an area of the PivotTable Fields task pane?

A) Filters Area B) Columns Area C) Data Area D) Rows Area Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 31) Where are the Expand Field and Collapse Field buttons located within the PivotTable Tools tab?

A) Filter group B) Calculations group C) Data group D) Active Field group Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 32) What is the default summary statistic for numerical fields in a PivotTable?

A) Average B) COUNT C) SUM D) STDEV Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 33) Which tool is best suited for use with PivotTables when the data is based on multiple tables?

A) PivotCharts B) Slicers C) Sorting D) Filters Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

34) Once a slicer is inserted into a worksheet which of the following actions cannot be performed?

A) Move the slicer B) Append the slicer C) Filter data D) Remove a filter Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 35) Which PivotTable calculation option is best suited for comparing the percentage of sales completed by one sales rep against the entire sales force?

A) % of Column Total B) % of Row Total C) Running Total D) % of Grand Total Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 36) Where are PivotTable formatting tools located?

A) PivotTable Tools Analysis tab B) Data tab C) PivotTable Tools Design tab D) Insert tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Format a PivotTable 37) Which of the following is not a PivotTable Subtotals option?

A) Do Not Show Subtotals B) Show All Subtotals at Bottom of Group C) Do Not Include Filtered Items in Totals D) Include Filtered Items in Totals Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Format a PivotTable 38) What tool is best suited for incorporating manufacturing information from one table with shipping information from a related table within one PivotTable?

A) Slicers B) PowerPivot C) Pivot Charts D) Grouping Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

39) Where are PowerPivot tools located on the Ribbon?

A) Insert tab B) Formulas tab C) Data tab D) Review tab Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 40) What tool is best suited for organizing a spreadsheet of rental cars by category in order to be collapsed or expanded?

A) Grouping B) PivotTables C) Slicers D) Outlines Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data 41) You must sort in order to properly execute a subtotal.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 42) Once applied, subtotals cannot be removed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 43) Once grouped, columns cannot be ungrouped.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data 44) A PivotTable can be created from the Quick Analysis gallery.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 45) Once created, a PivotTable cannot be edited.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

46) The default numerical field calculation for PivotTables is SUM. Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 47) PivotTables automatically refresh data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 48) Multiple subtotals can be applied to one data set.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 49) By default, PivotTables display aggregated data for each category.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 50) Multiple filters can be applied to a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 51) Once applied, slicers cannot be removed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 52) Slicers can only be removed from the Analyze tab in the Ribbon.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 53) Once slicers are created additional Slicer Styles can be applied.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 54) Custom slicers can be created in Excel.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

55) Custom calculated fields will not update if the data source changes.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 56) PowerPivot in an Excel add-in.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 57) Connections are automatically created in PowerPivot.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 58) After basic creation, various formatting styles can be applied to a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Format a PivotTable 59) Slicer captions can be used to provide instructions to users.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 60) Custom slicers can be imported into other workbooks.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 61) Label filters such as "Does Not Equal" can be applied to a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 62) Filters can only be applied to PivotTables one at a time.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 63) More than one function can be applied per field in a PivotTable.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

64) Once completed, fields in PivotTables can be rearranged.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 65) The Quick Analysis gallery is the only method to create a PivotTable.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 66) Adding ________ to a preexisting data set can help you identify which disciplines and which areas contribute the highest revenue for a company and which disciplines and areas produce the lowest revenue.

Answer: Subtotals Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 67) A(n) ________ should be performed before subtotaling data.

Answer: sort Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 68) The Subtotal feature creates a(n) ________, a hierarchical structure of data.

Answer: outline Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 69) When subtotals are applied, outline button number ________ displays the entire list.

Answer: 4 Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 70) ________ is the process of joining rows or columns of related data together into a single entity.

Answer: Grouping Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data 71) When subtotals are applied the + that appears above the worksheet is the ________ button.

Answer: expand Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Group and ungroup data

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

72) ________ is the process of analyzing large volumes of data, using advanced statistical techniques, and identifying trends and patterns in the data.

Answer: Data mining Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 73) A(n) ________ is a powerful, interactive data-mining feature that enables you to summarize and analyze data, especially helpful when working with large datasets.

Answer: PivotTable Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 74) A(n) ________ could be used to determine the most productive employee over an extended period of time.

Answer: PivotTable Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 75) PivotTables can be created from the ________ gallery.

Answer: Quick Analysis Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 76) When formatting the data to compile a PivotTable, meaningful ________ should be used.

Answer: column labels Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 77) PivotTables can be created from the ________ tab in the Ribbon.

Answer: Insert Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 78) When modifying a PivotTable, the ________ appears on the right side of the window.

Answer: PivotTable Fields task pane Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 79) In a PivotTable Fields task pane, the ________ filters the data to display results based on particular conditions you set.

Answer: Filters Area Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a PivotChart

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

80) In a PivotTable Fields task pane, the ________ subdivides data into one or more additional categories.

Answer: Columns Area Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 81) The default numerical field calculation for a PivotTable is ________.

Answer: SUM Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 82) To update the data in a PivotTable click ________ in the Data group.

Answer: Refresh Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable 83) A(n) ________ is a small window containing one button for each unique item in a field so that you can filter the PivotTable quickly.

Answer: slicer Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 84) ________ provide visual representations of data filters that are active in a PivotTable.

Answer: Slicers Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 85) The ________ is text that displays in the header at the top of the slicer window.

Answer: slicer caption Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 86) A(n) ________ is a user-defined field that does not exist in the original dataset.

Answer: calculated field Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 87) When the calculation options of a PivotTable are set to % of ________ Row Total, the PivotTable displays values as: (value for the item) / (value for the parent item on rows).

Answer: Parent Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

88) ________ is a built-in add-in program in Excel 2013 that enables you to import millions of rows of data from multiple data sources, create a relationship between two or more related tables within one workbook, and maintain connections.

Answer: PowerPivot Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 89) A(n) ________ is an association between two related tables where both tables contain a related field of data, such as IDs. Answer: relationship Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Use PowerPivot Functionality 90) A(n) ________ is an interactive graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable.

Answer: PivotChart Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a PivotChart 91) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. Subtotal II. Outline III. Collapse IV. Expand V. Grouping A. The process of joining rows or columns of related data together into a single entity B. A row within the dataset containing at least one aggregated value C. A hierarchical structure of data D. Restricting the view of a grouped data set E. Displaying all information in a grouped data set Answer: B, C, D, E, A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Subtotal data

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

92) Match the following grouping button with the corresponding description: I. 1 II. 2 III. 3 IV. 4 V. + A. Collapse outline to display the grand total only.

B. Displays subtotals by the main subtotal category, the secondary subtotal category, and the grand total.

C. Expand an outline group to see its details.

D. Display the entire list.

E. Display subtotals by the main subtotal category and the grand total.

Answer: A, C, E, D, B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Subtotal data 93) Match the following calculated field settings with the corresponding description: I. PivotTable II. Quick Analysis gallery III. Subtotal IV. PivotTable Fields task pane V. Data mining A. The process of analyzing large volumes of data, using advanced statistical techniques, and identifying trends and patterns in the data B. A row within the dataset containing at least one aggregated value C. A method of creating a PivotTable within a worksheet D. A powerful, interactive data-mining feature that enables you to summarize and analyze data E. Contains two sections that allow for the editing of a PivotTable Answer: D, C, B, E, A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

94) Match the following PivotTable areas with the corresponding description: I. PivotTable Fields task pane II. Filters Area III. Columns Area IV. Rows Area V. Values Area A. Organizes and groups data into categories on the left side. Each group name occupies a single row.

B. Displays summary statistics, such as totals or averages.

C. Subdivides data into one or more additional categories.

D. Filters the data to display results based on particular conditions you set.

E. Contains two sections that allow for the editing of a PivotTable.

Answer: E, D, C, A, B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 95) Match the following Pivot Table move options with the corresponding description: I. Move Up II. Move Down III. Move to Beginning IV. Move to End V. Move to Report Filter A. To the end of the Report Filter area of the PivotTable B. To the end of all fields in the same area C. To the beginning of all fields in the same area D. Up one position in the hierarchy within the same area E. Down one position in the hierarchy within the same area Answer: D, E, C, B, A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Modify a PivotTable

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

96) Match the following calculated field settings with the corresponding description: I. Slicer II. Filter III. Calculated Field IV. PivotChart V. Slicer caption A. An interactive graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable B. Text that displays in the header at the top of the slicer window C. A small window containing one button for each unique item in a field so that you can filter the PivotTable quickly D. A user-defined field that does not exist in the original dataset E. Excludes particular categories or values Answer: C, E, D, A, B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 97) Match each Slicer Tools command group with the corresponding description: I. Slicer II. Slicer Styles III. Arrange IV. Buttons V. Size A. Specifies the slicer's placement in relation to other groups, such as placing a slicer on top of other slicers.

B. Sets the height and width of the slicer window.

C. Defines how many columns are displayed in the selected slicer and the height and width of each button inside the slicer.

D. Applies a style to the slicer by specifying the color of the filtered item in the slicer.

E. Enables you to change the slicer caption, display the Slicer Settings dialog box for further customization, and manage the PivotTable connected to the slicer.

Answer: E, D, A, C, B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

98) Match the following calculated field settings with the corresponding description: I. % of Grand Total II. % of Column Total III. % of Row Total IV. % of Parent Row Total V. Running Total A. Displays values as: (value for the item) / (value for the parent item on rows) B. Displays each value as a percentage of the respective row total. The values in each row total 100% C. Displays each value as a percentage of the respective column total. The values in each column total 100% D. Displays values as running totals E. Displays each value as a percentage of the grand total Answer: E, C, B, A, D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a calculated field 99) Match the following calculated field settings with the corresponding description I. PivotTable Styles II. Calculated field III. Slicer caption IV. PivotTable Fields task pane V. Quick Analysis gallery A. A user-defined field that does not exist in the original dataset B. Contains two sections that allow for the editing of a PivotTable C. A method of creating a PivotTable within a worksheet D. Text that displays in the header at the top of the slicer window E. Controls bold formatting, font colors, shading colors, and border lines of a PivotTable.

Answer: E, A, D, B, C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Format a PivotTable

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) Match the following terms to their meanings: I. PowerPivot II. Relationship III. Add-in IV. PivotChart V. Slicer A. A small window containing one button for each unique item in a field so that you can filter the PivotTable quickly B. An interactive graphical representation of the data in a PivotTable C. An association between two related tables where both tables contain a related field of data, such as IDs D. A built-in add-in program in Excel 2013 that enables you to import millions of rows of data from multiple data sources, create a relationship between two or more related tables within one workbook, and maintain connections E. A third party application that adds additional functionality to Excel Answer: D, C, E, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a PivotChart 101) What are the benefits of using PivotTables over traditional data tables?

Answer: PivotTables have more robust calculation and viewing options than traditional data tables. The concept of “pivot” refers to their ability to present the same data from multiple angles, giving the user the ability to gain additional insight on the data.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Create a PivotTable 102) In what situations would you change the default data field calculations settings of a PivotTable?

Answer: The ability to vary data field calculations is one of the strengths of PivotTables. They are best used in situations in which the default calculation settings would yield misleading results. For example when evaluating survey results based on age ranges in which each age group is not equally represented in the results. If the value fields are set to sum, this will yield results the lean towards the largest represented group.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable 103) What are the benefits of using Slicers over traditional filters?

Answer: Slicers work similar to traditional filters in a PivotTable, however, they add an additional graphical element that is more user friendly then traditional drop down menus. Along with ease of use, they also have the ability to be formatted and placed in aesthetically pleasing methods giving the workbook a clean professional look.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Filter and slice a PivotTable

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 6 What-If Analysis: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) To compare monthly mortgage payments, total amounts to repay a loan, and total interest based on varying the interest rate, you would use ________.

A) a multi-variable data table B) a one-variable data table C) Solver D) Goal Seek Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables 2) The ________ value replaces the original input value of the variable in a data table.

A) replacement B) substitution C) trial D) sample Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables 3) To compare monthly mortgage payments based on varying the interest rate and the cost of the house, you would use ________.

A) Scenario Manager B) Goal Seek C) a two-variable data table D) a multi-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables 4) A series of ________ indicates that the width of a column is too narrow to display the complete number.

A) asterisks (*) B) pound signs (#) C) carets (^) D) ampersands (@) Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Given an interest rate, the number of years, and a planned down payment, you would use ________ to find the highest cost of a house you can afford while maintaining the monthly payment.

A) a one-variable data table B) a two-variable data table C) Solver D) Goal Seek Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager 6) In the Goal Seek dialog box, the cell reference of the desired value is entered in the ________ box.

A) To value B) By changing cell C) Set cell D) Column input cell Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager 7) Best-Case, Worst-Case, and Mostly Likely are descriptive names used to identify ________.

A) arguments B) scenarios C) parameters D) outcomes Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager 8) A scenario ________ is used to compare multiple scenarios.

A) comparison table B) analysis table C) relationship report D) summary report Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager 9) Which of the following What-If analysis tools is an add-in?

A) Solver B) Scenario Manager C) Goal Seek D) PivotTable Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) When using Solver, the ________ cell contains the formula used to optimize the results.

A) objective B) pivotal C) changing D) optimizing Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 11) To optimize the monthly payments, you would designate the home cost, down payment, APR, and number of years for the loan as the ________ variable cells.

A) changing B) objective C) dependent D) independent Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 12) ________ are restrictions or limitations imposed on Solver as it determines the optimum value.

A) Bounds B) Constraints C) Restraints D) Controls Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 13) Data tables can be constructed using one, two, or three variables.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables 14) When entering text to be displayed in the column headings of a data table, the text must be enclosed in quotation marks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: One- and Two-Variable Data Tables 15) Goal Seek is limited to manipulating only one variable and one result.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

16) You can have multiple scenarios in a workbook, but you can have only one scenario on each worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Goal Seek and Scenario Manager 17) A plug-in is a program that has to be added to Excel to extend its functionality.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 18) Solver is an add-in What-If Analysis tool.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Solver 19) A Solver report is displayed on the same worksheet immediately below the data.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Solver

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 6 What-If Analysis 1) By default, the Solver add-in is active.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 2) Goal Seek is an Excel add-in.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 3) Scenario Manager is an Excel add-in.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 4) Scenario Manager can be set to maximize the objective cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 5) Solver can be set to maximize the objective cell.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 6) Goal Seek can be set to minimize the objective cell.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 7) Scenario summary reports update when input cells are changed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 8) Solver constraints can be set to restrict values to integers.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 9) If not specified by the user, Solver optimization models can produce negative results.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Solver models can be saved and restored.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 11) Deleted Solver constraints can be restored.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 12) Multiple objective cells can be used with Goal Seek.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 13) Multiple objective cells can be used with Scenario Manager.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 14) A two-variable data table allows two variables but only one result.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 15) In order to complete a two-variable data table, a formula or reference to a formula must be entered in the top-left corner.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 16) A substitution value replaces the original input value of a variable in a data table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 17) Substitution values can be manually entered.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 18) When creating a one-variable data table, one or more formulas that relate to the variable must be used.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

19) When creating a one-variable data table with substitution values in a horizontal row, the formula reference must be on the row below and one column to the left of the first substitution value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 20) When creating a one-variable data table with substitution values in a vertical column, the formula reference must be on the row below and one column to the left of the first substitution value.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 21) Two reference formulas are required to complete a two-variable data table.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 22) There is no limit to the number of scenarios that can be created with Scenario Manager.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 23) When using Scenario Manager, scenarios can be edited.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 24) Scenario Manager can create PivotTable reports.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 25) Solver can solve linear and nonlinear problems.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

26) What what-if analysis tool would you use to compare the impact of different interest rates on a car payment?

A) Solver B) Goal Seek C) One-variable data table D) Two-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 27) Which what-if analysis tool is best suited to determine the exact interest rate required for a $600 car payment repaid over five years?

A) Solver B) Goal Seek C) Scenario Manager D) One-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 28) Which of the following tools has the ability to generate a report?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) One-variable data table D) Two-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 29) What is the maximum number of scenarios supported by Scenario Manager?

A) 23 B) 45 C) 32 D) 50 Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 30) Which of the following tools is an add-in?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) Solver D) One-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

31) Which of the following tools has the ability to manipulate constraints?

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) Scenario Manager D) Two-variable Data Table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 32) Which of the following is not a method supported by Solver?

A) GRG Nonlinear B) Simplex LP C) Evolutionary D) Duplex Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 33) When creating a one-variable data table that depicts the effect of different interest rates on a car payment, the interest rate is an example of which of the following?

A) Variable B) Constraint C) Objective cell D) Set cell Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 34) Which of the following tools is best suited for comparing the effects of two variables on a formula?

A) Solver B) Goal Seek C) Two-variable data table D) One-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 35) Which of the following tools is best suited for comparing the effects of one set of substitution values on a formula?

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) Scenario Manager D) One-variable data table Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

36) When creating substitution values using the Series dialog box, what is the last number used in the substitution values?

A) Stop value B) Step value C) Integer D) Constraint Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 37) In order to complete a two-variable data table, which of the following must be included in the table?

A) Formula B) Constraint C) Absolute reference D) Integer Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 38) What is the best tool to determine the required downpayment to reach a $700 car payment?

A) Solver B) Goal Seek C) Scenario Manager D) One-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 39) Where is Scenario Manager located in Excel?

A) Formula tab B) Backstage C) Data tab D) View tab Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 40) Where is Goal Seek located in Excel?

A) Formula tab B) Backstage C) View tab D) Data tab Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

41) Which what-if analysis tool is best used for creating optimization models?

A) One-variable data table B) Two-variable data table C) Solver D) Goal Seek Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 42) The Solver add-in appears in which tab group when active in Excel?

A) Outline B) Sort & Filter C) Analysis D) Data Tools Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 43) Goal Seek appears in which tab group within Excel?

A) Outline B) Data Tools C) Sort & Filter D) Analysis Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 44) Which of the following tools can manipulate changing variable cells?

A) Goal Seek B) One-variable data table C) Two-variable data table D) Solver Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 45) When calculating the optimal blend of down payment and interest rate to purchase an automobile, a limit of no more than a $10,000 down payment is an example of which of the following?

A) Nonbinding constraint B) Objective cell C) Integer D) Set cell Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

46) When saving a Solver model which of the following is not saved?

A) Objective value B) Changing variable cells C) Constraints D) Set cell Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 47) Which is the best tool for determining the optimal blend of products to produce in order to maximize profit?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) Solver D) Two-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 48) Which what-if analysis tool is the best tool for evaluating various scenarios based on variables within a formula?

A) Scenario Manager B) Goal Seek C) Solver D) One-variable data table Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 49) Which what-if analysis tool is best for manipulating one variable to determine one result?

A) Scenario Manager B) Goal Seek C) Solver D) One-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 50) Which dialog box enables you to specify the result cells for a scenario summary report?

A) Scenario Summary B) Scenario Values C) Add Scenario D) Solver Options Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

51) This analysis tool has the ability to handle multiple adjustable cells while minimizing, maximizing, or meeting goals.

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) Solver D) Two-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 52) How can you determine if the Solver add-in is active?

A) Solver is an option on the Home tab B) Solver appears on the Data tab C) Solver is available via right-click D) Solver appears in the Goal Seek dialog box Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 53) Which what-if analysis tool is best to determine the optimal amount of shoes to produce in order to maximize profit and use 100% of materials?

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) Scenario Manager D) Two-variable Data Table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 54) Which what-if analysis tool is best to determine the number of t-shirts to sell in order to earn $500 with no constraints?

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) Scenario Manager D) Two-variable data table Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

55) Which what-if analysis tool is best suited to determine the input value needed to achieve a specific output?

A) Solver B) Scenario Manager C) Goal Seek D) Two-variable Data Table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 56) Comments can be added to Scenarios in which tab or dialog box?

A) Goal Seek dialog box B) Home tab C) View tab D) Scenario Manager dialog box Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 57) Which of the following what-if analysis tools updates date in real time?

A) Solver B) Goal Seek C) Scenario Manager D) One-variable data table Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 58) Where should the formula or formula reference be located in a two-variable date table?

A) Lower right corner B) Upper right corner C) Top left corner D) Lower left corner Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 59) If Doug would like to determine how many hot dogs to sell at a profit margin of $10.00 to raise $250.00 without constraints, which what-if analysis tool should he use?

A) Scenario Manager B) Goal Seek C) Solver D) Two-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

60) Which what-if analysis tool is best suited to calculate the impact of interest rate changes based on different economic climates?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) Solver D) One-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 61) Where do scenario summary reports appear?

A) A new worksheet B) A new workbook C) The current worksheet D) A pop up box Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 62) Which of the following calculations on the target cell is not supported by Solver?

A) Maximize B) Range C) Minimize D) Exact value Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 63) Where is the check box to activate Solver located?

A) Data tab B) View tab C) Add-Ins tab D) Add-Ins dialog box Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 64) Which of the following options is required to complete a Solver model?

A) Objective cell B) Constraint C) Set cell D) Scenario Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

65) Which of the following what-if analysis tools has the ability to limit values to whole numbers?

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) Solver D) One-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 66) A(n) ________ is used to compare the impacts of one variable on a calculated result.

Answer: One-variable data table Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 67) A(n) ________ is used to compare the impacts of two variables on a calculated result.

Answer: Two-variable data table Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 68) When creating a two-variable data table, the formula or reference should be placed in the ________.

Answer: upper left corner Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table 69) All what-if analysis tools are located in the ________ tab.

Answer: Data Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 70) The ________ replaces the original input value of a variable in a data table.

Answer: substitution value Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 71) ________ is the tool best suited to determine the down payment needed to achieve a $500.00 car payment.

Answer: Goal Seek Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 72) ________ will vary one input value to reach one optimized result.

Answer: Goal Seek Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

73) ________ scenarios can be created within Scenario Manager.

Answer: 32, Thirty-two Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 74) ________ can be used to compare the effects of several scenarios on calculated results.

Answer: Scenario Manager Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 75) User created scenarios are stored in a(n) ________.

Answer: worksheet Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 76) A(n) ________ is an organized formatted structured report that appears in in the form of a worksheet outline.

Answer: scenario summary report Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 77) Scenario summary reports are placed on/in a ________.

Answer: new worksheet Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 78) ________ is an Excel add-in.

A) Goal Seek B) Scenario Manager C) One-variable data table D) Solver Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 79) A list of active add-ins can be viewed in the ________.

A) Add-Ins Dialog box B) Scenario Dialog box C) Data tab D) View tab Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

80) When active the Solver add-in is located on the ________ tab.

A) View B) Formulas C) Data D) Insert Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Load the Solver add-in 81) ________ is the best what-if analysis tool to solve complex linear and nonlinear problems.

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) One-variable data table D) Scenario Manager Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 82) ________ has the ability to restrict variable cells to integers.

A) Goal Seek B) Solver C) Scenario Manager D) Two-variable data table Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 83) ________ has the ability to generate Answer Reports.

A) Goal Seek B) One-variable data table C) Solver D) Two-variable data table Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 84) A(n) ________ is a structured range that contains different values for one variable to compare how these values affect one or more calculated results.

Answer: one-variable data table Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 85) ________ specify the restrictions or limitations imposed on a spreadsheet model as Solver determines the optimum value of the objective cell.

Answer: Constraints Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

86) Solver summary reports appear on/in a(n) ________.

Answer: new worksheet Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 87) Solver models can be restored from the ________.

Answer: Solver Parameters dialog box Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 88) A(n) ________ is a constraint that does not restrict the target value that Solver finds.

Answer: nonbinding constraint Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 89) A________ is a rule that Solver has to enforce to reach the objective value.

A) binding constraint B) stop value C) nonbinding constraint D) step value Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 90) A(n) ________ specifies the cell that contains a formula that produces a value that you want to optimize with Solver.

Answer: objective cell Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. One-variable data table II. Two-variable data table III. Goal Seek IV. Scenario Manager V. Solver A. An Excel Add-in B. A structured range that contains different values for two variables to compare how these differing values affect the results for one calculated value.

C. A what-if analysis tool that enables you to define and manage up to 32 scenarios to compare their effects on calculated results D. A tool that enables you to specify a desired result from a formula E. A structured range that contains different values for one variable to compare how these values affect one or more calculated results Answer: E, B, D, C, A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 92) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Variable II. What-if analysis III. Substitution value IV. Stop value V. Step value A. Value increments when filling a series B. An input value that can change to other values to affect the results of a situation C. The ending value for the series D. A value that replaces the original input value of the variable in a data table E. Enables you to experiment with different variables or assumptions so that you can observe and compare how these changes affect a related outcome Answer: B, E, D, C, A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Add-in II. Binding constraint III. Constraint IV. Changing variable cell V. Solver A. An add-in application that manipulates variables based on constraints to find the optimal solution to a problem B. A cell containing a variable whose value changes until Solver optimizes the value in the objective cell C. A program that can be added to Excel to provide enhanced function D. A limitation that imposes restrictions on Solver E. A constraint that Solver enforces to reach the target value Answer: C, E, D, B, A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 94) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Non binding constraint II. Optimization model III. Objective cell IV. Solver V. Binding constraint A. The cell that contains the formula-based value that you want to maximize, minimize, or set to a value in Solver B. An add-in application that manipulates variables based on constraints to find the optimal solution to a problem C. A constraint that Solver enforces to reach the target value D. Finds the highest, lowest, or exact value for one particular result by adjusting values for selected variables E. A constraint that does not restrict the target value that Solver finds Answer: E, D, A, B, C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Scenario Manager II. Scenario Summary Report III. Scenario IV. Goal Seek V. Optimization model A. Finds the highest, lowest, or exact value for one particular result by adjusting values for selected variables B. A tool that identifies the necessary input value to obtain a desired goal C. A worksheet that contains scenario results D. Enables you to define and manage scenarios to compare how they affect results E. Detailed sets of values that represent different possible situations Answer: D, C, E, B, A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Generate scenario summary reports 96) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Goal Seek II. Solver III. Scenario Manager IV. Variable V. Objective cell A. An add-in application that manipulates variables based on constraints to find the optimal solution to a problem B. A tool that identifies the necessary input value to obtain a desired goal C. An input value that can change to other values to affect the results of a situation D. Specifies the cell that contains a formula that produces a value that you want to optimize E. Enables you to define and manage scenarios to compare how they affect results Answer: B, A, E, C, D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

97) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Goal Seek II. Set Cell III. Solver IV. Solver Report V. Objective cell A. specifies the cell that contains a formula that produces a value that you want to optimize B. A new worksheet that contains the results of the Solver Add-in C. An add-in application that manipulates variables based on constraints to find the optimal solution to a problem D. The formula cell to be optimized with Goal Seek E. A tool that identifies the necessary input value to obtain a desired goal Answer: E, D, C, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Identify an input value with Goal Seek 98) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. One-variable data table II. Two-variable data table III. Substitution value IV. Stop value V. Step value A. A structured range that contains different values for two variables to compare how these differing values affect the results for one calculated value B. Value increments when filling a series C. The ending value for the series D. A value that replaces the original input value of the variable in a data table E. A structured range that contains different values for one variable to compare how these values affect one or more calculated results Answer: E, A, D, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a two-variable data table

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

99) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Scenario II. Scenario Manager III. Scenario Summary Report IV. Changing cells V. Comments A. Notes regarding the creation date of a scenario B. Cells containing scenario variables C. Enables you to define and manage scenarios to compare how they affect results D. An organized structured table of the scenarios, their input values, and their respective results E. Detailed sets of values that represent different possible situations Answer: E, C, D, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager 100) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Solver II. Add-in III. Optimization models IV. Non binding constraint V. Objective cell A. Find the highest, lowest, or exact value for one particular result by adjusting values for selected variables B. Specifies the cell that contains a formula that produces a value that you want to optimize C. A constraint that does not restrict the target value that Solver finds D. An add-in application that searches for the best or optimum solution to a problem by manipulating the values for several variables within restrictions that you impose E. Programs that can be added to Excel to provide enhanced functionality Answer: D, E, A, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver 101) What is the benefit of using Solver over Goal Seek and Scenario Manager?

Answer: Solver is the most robust of the What-if Analysis tools. Solver holds two benefits over both Goal Seek and Scenario Manager. While Goal Seek can solve simple equations, it lacks the ability to maximize or minimize results. It also lacks the ability to generate reports. In contrast, Scenario Manager does have the ability to manipulate multiple variables and generate reports, however, it lacks the ability to handle economic constraints.

Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Optimize results with Solver

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

102) What is the difference between a one-variable and two-variable data table?

Answer: One- and two-variable data tables, can be used to gauge the sensitivity of an outcome based on varying inputs. For example the impact of varying interest rates on a mortgage payment. The difference between one- and two-variable data tables is that a one-variable data table has the ability to determine sensitivity based on one varying variable such as interest rate, while two- variable data tables can determine the impact of results on two variables such as interest rate and purchase price.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a one-variable data table 103) What are the benefits of using Scenario Manager?

Answer: The benefit of Scenario Manager is its ability to compare several variables effects on the outcome of calculated results. This gives the user the ability to create multiple scenarios and gauge how they affect a specific outcome. Scenario Manager also has the ability to place the results in either a Pivot or traditionally formatted report.

Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Use Scenario Manager

21 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 7 Specialized Functions: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) Entering an IF in the Value_if_true box or in the Value_if_false box, creates a(n) ________ function.

A) embedded B) complex C) compound D) nested Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions 2) The ________ function results in a TRUE value only if all conditions are true.

A) OR B) AND C) NOT D) NOR Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions 3) You would use the ________ function to return the position of a value in a list.

A) AND B) IF C) MATCH D) INDEX Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions 4) IF and AND are examples of ________ functions.

A) logical B) database C) financial D) statistical Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) When constructing an advanced filter, the ________ range is a range of cells containing the filter conditions.

A) specification B) criteria C) output D) input Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Database Filtering and Functions 6) Which of the following is NOT a database function?

A) DAVERAGE B) DMAX C) DCOUNT D) DEFREQUENCY Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Database Filtering and Functions 7) Knowing the interest rate, number of payments, and the monthly payments, you would use the ________ function to determine the amount of a loan.

A) FV B) PV C) IPMT D) PPMT Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions 8) When a loan is repaid, the total principal matches the ________ for the final payment.

A) future value B) present value C) total interest D) cumulative principal Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions 9) Which of the following is NOT a financial function?

A) DSUM B) CUMIPMT C) PV D) IPMT Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Which of the following functions would NOT be used to construct an amortization table?

A) PPMT B) IPMT C) PV D) CUMPRINC Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions 11) =IF(AND(D7="manager",F7<F$3), "Due for raise","NA") is an example of a compound function.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions 12) MATCH and INDEX are logical functions.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Logical and Lookup Functions 13) The criteria range is a range of cells that specifies the conditions used to filter a table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Database Filtering and Functions 14) DMIN is a database function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Database Filtering and Functions 15) A loan amortization table is a schedule that shows the interest, principal repayment, and remaining balance.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions 16) CUMIPMT and CUMPRINC are lookup functions.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Financial Functions

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 7 Specialized Functions 1) What is the first argument of the IF function?

A) Value_if_false B) Value_if_true C) logical_test D) lookup_value Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 2) What is the second argument of the IF function?

A) Value_if_false B) Value_if_true C) logical_test D) lookup_value Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 3) Which of the following is a nested function?

A) =IF(AND(B7>5),"Yes","No") B) =SUM(B6:B10) C) =VLOOKUP(B8,A10:B20,2) D) =HLOOKUP(B8,A10:B20,2) Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 4) If there are four possible outcomes, how many logical tests are required?

A) 4 B) 3 C) 2 D) 1 Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 5) Which of the following functions does not support multiple conditions?

A) AND B) OR C) MATCH D) NOT Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) When using the MATCH function with an exact match lookup_value, the match type must be set to: A) 1.

B) 0.

C) -1.

D) 2.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 7) Which function will return the intersection of a specific row and column?

A) VLOOKUP B) HLOOKUP C) INDEX D) MATCH Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 8) Which of the following has the ability to restrict data view to only information that fits predetermined criteria?

A) VLOOKUP B) Advanced Filter C) HLOOKUP D) INDEX Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 9) Which of the following functions will return the interest payment of a loan?

A) CUMPRINC B) PMT C) PPMT D) IPMT Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 10) Which of the following functions will return the principal payment of a loan?

A) CUMPRINC B) PMT C) PPMT D) IPMT Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) Which of the following functions will calculate the total interest paid between select periods?

A) CUMPRINC B) PPMT C) IPMT D) CUMIPMT Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 12) Which of the following functions will calculate the total principal paid between select periods?

A) CUMPRINC B) PPMT C) IPMT D) CUMIPMT Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 13) Which function will calculate the current value on an investment that will earn 5% interest on yearly payments of $100 over 10 years?

A) FV B) PV C) NPV D) PMT Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 14) Which function will calculate the final value of an investment of $100 a month that earns 4% interest over 5 years?

A) PV B) FV C) NPV D) IPMT Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) Which function will calculate the periodic interest rate of a loan with a $500 payment on a $20000 loan paid back over 5 years?

A) FV B) RATE C) NPV D) PV Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 16) Which function will return the total number of periods on a $20000 loan at 5% interest and a $600 payment?

A) NPER B) RATE C) IPMT D) PPMT Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 17) Which of the following functions requires all arguments to be true in order to return the value if true?

A) AND B) OR C) NOT D) IT Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 18) Which database function will return the largest value from a dataset based on preset criteria?

A) DCOUNT B) DSUM C) DMIN D) DMAX Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

19) Which database function will return the smallest value from a dataset based on preset criteria?

A) DCOUNT B) DSUM C) DMIN D) DMAX Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 20) Which of the following logical functions will return a value if false if one of the arguments is false?

A) OR B) AND C) NOT D) IF Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 21) Which database function should be used to count records with empty cells?

A) DCOUNT B) DCOUNTA C) DGET D) DSUM Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 22) Which of the following functions returns the position of a value in a list?

A) INDEX B) MATCH C) VLOOKUP D) HLOOKUP Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 23) Which of the following functions has the ability to copy all results to a new location?

A) DSUM B) DMIN C) Advanced Filter D) IPMT Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

24) When using Advanced Filtering empty cells in the criteria range will return which of the following?

A) All records B) No records C) Select records D) NA Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 25) When using Advanced Filtering < > is the equivalent of: A) equal to.

B) not equal to.

C) greater than.

D) less than.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 26) What is the maximum number of IF statements in a formula?

A) 32 B) 54 C) 64 D) 100 Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 27) =IF(E5<J7,F5*K7,IF(E5<=J8,F5*K8,F5*K9)) is an example of a(n): A) Database function.

B) Look Up function.

C) Advanced Filter.

D) Nested IF function.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 28) In the function =IF(E5<J7,F5*K7,IF(E5<=J8,F5*K8,F5*K9)), F5*K7 is the: A) Value_if_true.

B) Value_if_false.

C) Logical_test.

D) Modifier.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

29) Which of the following functions returns a value or the reference to a value within a range based on X and Y coordinates?

A) MATCH B) INDEX C) VLOOKUP D) HLOOKUP Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 30) Which of the following functions should be used to evaluate multiple conditions with only two possible outcomes?

A) AND B) DSUM C) IF D) DMAX Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 31) Which of the following is not a function for evaluating multiple conditions with only two possible outcomes?

A) AND B) MAX C) OR D) NOT Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 32) Which of the following is not an argument in a database function?

A) Database B) Filter C) Field D) Criteria Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

33) The first argument of the INDEX function is: A) row_num.

B) array.

C) column_num.

D) match type.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 34) When using Advanced Filtering, the criteria range must contain at least: A) three rows.

B) one columns.

C) three columns.

D) two rows.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 35) Which of the following database functions is best suited to add total salaries from a database that are higher than $30,000?

A) DMIN B) DSUM C) DMAX D) DCOUNTA Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 36) When the DAVERAGE function returns #DIV/0: A) there are no records that fit the criteria.

B) there is a typo in the function.

C) a second criteria is needed.

D) the incorrect function was used.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 37) Which of the following calculates the net present value of an investment, given a fixed discount rate?

A) PV B) FV C) NPV D) IPMT Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

38) In the FV function, the rate argument refers to the: A) total number of periods.

B) repayment type.

C) periodic rate.

D) payment.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 39) Which of the following is the best choice to lookup values when VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP are not possible?

A) LOOKUP B) DGET C) MATCH and INDEX D) SUM Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 40) Returns the value or the reference to a value within a range based on X and Y coordinates.

A) DSUM B) INDEX C) IPMT D) PPMT Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 41) The maximum number of IF statements in one formula is 64.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 42) If an IF statement has four outcomes, it will require three logical tests.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 43) In order for the AND function to return a true value, all arguments must be true.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 44) In order for the OR function to return a true value, one or more arguments must be true.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

45) In order for the NOT function to return a true value, all arguments must be false.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 46) If no values exist in the logical argument, the AND function returns the #VALUE! error.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 47) The MATCH function will return a value of 1 if the given lookup_value is the largest number in an array of numbers.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 48) The MATCH function match_type must be set to 0 when matching words.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 49) Advanced filtering will not copy results to a new location.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 50) If the criteria of an advanced filter is blank no records will be returned.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 51) To perform an advanced filter with an OR condition you must select at least two rows of the criteria range.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 52) The database argument of any database function requires the selection of the entire table.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

53) The criteria range of a database function must contain at least one column heading and one cell of information.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 54) PPMT should be used to calculate the specific interest paid on one installment of a loan.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 55) The IPMT function should be used to calculate the specific interest paid on one installment of a loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 56) The CUMPRINC function requires both starting and ending evaluation dates.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 57) CUMIPMT calculates the cumulative interest throughout a loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 58) CUMPRINC contains six arguments.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 59) The FV function is best suited for calculating the current value of an investment.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 60) A PMT of zero can be used in the FV function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 61) The RATE function returns the periodic rate for an investment or loan.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

62) The NPER function would be best used to determine the periodic interest rate of an investment.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 63) The PV function would be best suited to calculate the future value of an investment.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 64) =INDEX(A2:B5,MATCH(MAX(B2:B5),B2:B5,0),1) is an example of a nested function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 65) The MATCH function can be used to match words.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 66) Excel permits ________ IF statements in one formula.

Answer: 64 Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 67) The ________ function is best suited when two or more logical tests are required and all conditions must be true in order to return the value_if_true.

Answer: AND Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 68) The ________ function is best suited when two or more logical tests are required and at least one condition must be true to return the value_if_true.

Answer: OR Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 69) The ________ function returns the position of a value in a list.

Answer: INDEX Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

70) The MATCH type should be set to ________ when matching words with the MATCH function.

Answer: 0 Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 71) All database functions require a user defined: A) set cell.

B) criteria range.

C) target range.

D) filter.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 72) ________ can copy filtered information to a new location.

Answer: Advanced filtering Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 73) The ________ function is best suited to return the highest numerical value of a range of values within a database.

Answer: DMAX Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 74) ________ is the best database function for counting data that contains empty cells.

Answer: DCOUNTA Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 75) ________ calculates the standard deviation of a sample population.

Answer: DSTDEV Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 76) ________ will return the interest paid for one installment of a loan.

Answer: IPMT Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 77) ________ will return the total interest paid within a time range on a loan.

Answer: CUMIPMT Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

78) ________ will return the principal paid on one specific payment of a loan.

Answer: PPMT Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 79) The ________ function should be used to calculate the interest paid on the first payment of a mortgage.

Answer: IPMT Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 80) The ________ should be used to calculate the periodic rate of a loan given the NPER, PMT, and PV. Answer: RATE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 81) The ________ function should be used to calculate the total number of periods in a loan.

Answer: NPER Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 82) A(n) ________ is a schedule that calculates the interest, principal repayment, and remaining balance of a loan.

Answer: amortization table Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 83) If a nested IF statement has 6 possible outcomes it requires ________ logical tests.

A) 6 B) 5 C) 0 D) 7 Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 84) The ________ function will only trigger the value_if_true if all conditions given are false.

Answer: NOT Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 85) The first argument of any database function is ________.

Answer: database Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

86) The ________ function determines the arithmetic mean, or average, of numeric entries in a database column.

Answer: DAVERAGE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 87) The ________ function returns a user defined message if an error is detected.

Answer: IFERROR Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 88) If payments are made at the beginning of the month the type argument should be set to ________ when using the IPMT function Answer: 1 Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 89) If payments are made at the end of the month the type argument should be set to ________ when using the IPMT function Answer: 0 Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 90) The end_period argument should have the value of ________ if you are calculating cumulative interest using CUMIPMT for the third payment of a loan.

Answer: 3 Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table 91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Nested function II. IF III. AND IV. OR V. NOT A. A function that tests if one argument is met B. A function to test if no arguments are met C. A function to test if at least one or more conditions are met D. A function to test to see if multiple conditions are met E. A function that is embedded within an argument of another function Answer: E, A, D, C, B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

92) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. MATCH II. INDEX III. HLOOKUP IV. VLOOKUP V. Lookup_value A. Looks for a value in the left most column of a table, and then returns a value in the same row from a column you specify B. Looks for a value in the top row of a table or array of values and returns the value in the same column from a row you specify C. Returns a value or the reference to a value within a range based on X and Y coordinates D. The value that you want to find in the array or list.

E. Returns the position of a value in a list Answer: E, C, B, A, D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 93) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Database function II. DMIN III. DMAX IV. DAVERAGE V. DSUM A. Identifies the lowest value in a database column that matches conditions you specify B. Identifies the highest value in a database column that matches conditions you specify. For example, you can use the DMAX function to determine the highest salary of account reps in Boston.

C. Determines the arithmetic mean, or average, of numeric entries in a database column that match conditions you specify D. Adds the values in a numeric database column based on conditions you specify in a criteria range E. Analyze data for selected records only in a database table Answer: E, A, B, C, D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

94) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Loan amortization II. IPMT III. PPMT IV. CUMIPMT V. CUMPRINC A. Calculates the cumulative interest throughout a loan amortization table B. Calculates the principal payment for a specified payment period on a loan or an investment given a fixed interest rate, term, and periodic payments C. Calculates the cumulative principal throughout a loan amortization table D. Calculates the periodic interest for a specified payment period on a loan or an investment given a fixed interest rate, term, and periodic payments E. A schedule that calculates the interest, principal repayment, and remaining balance Answer: E, D, B, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 95) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. DAVERAGE II. DMIN III. DMAX IV. DSUM V. DCOUNT A. Adds the values in a numeric database column based on conditions you specify in a criteria range B. Determines the arithmetic mean, or average, of numeric entries in a database column that match conditions you specify C. Counts the cells that contain numbers in a database column that match conditions you specify D. Identifies the highest value in a database column that matches conditions you specify E. Identifies the lowest value in a database column that matches conditions you specify Answer: B, E, D, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

96) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. PV II. FV III. NPER IV. RATE V. NPV A. Calculates the periodic rate for an investment or loan given the number of payment periods, a fixed periodic payment, and present E, value B. Calculates the number of payment periods for an investment or loan given a fixed interest rate, periodic payment, and present value.

C. Calculates the net present value of an investment, given a fixed discount rate (rate of return) and a set of given cash inflows D. Calculates the future value of an investment, given a fixed interest rate, term, and periodic payment E. Calculates the total present (i.e., current) value of a series of payments that will be made in the future Answer: E, D, B, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations 97) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. NPER II. FV III. IPMT IV. PPMT V. CUMIPMT A. Use this function to calculate the total interest paid on a mortgage B. Use this function to calculate the amount of principle paid on the first payment of a car loan C. Use this function to calculate the number of periods in a loan D. Use this function to calculate the future value E. Use this function to calculate the interest of the first payment of an autoloan Answer: C, D, E, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

98) Match the following functions with the corresponding description.

I. AND II. OR III. NOT IV. IF V. INDEX A. A function to test if no arguments are met B. A function to test if at least one or more conditions are met C. A function to test to see if multiple conditions are met D. Returns a value or the reference to a value within a range based on X and Y coordinates E. A function that tests if one argument is met Answer: C, B, A, E, D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Create a nested logical function 99) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. RATE II. NPER III. INDEX IV. MATCH V. FV A. Use this function to return a value given X and Y coordinates B. Use this function to determine the future value of an investment C. Use this function to determine the number of payments in an autoloan D. Use this function to determine the interest rate of a loan E. Returns the position of a value in a list Answer: D, C, A, E, B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform other financial calculations

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. < > II. < III. > IV. >= V. <= A. Greater than B. Not equal to C. Less than D. Less than or equal to E. Greater than or equal to Answer: B, C, A, E, D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Manipulate data with database functions 101) What is the benefit of using MATCH nested with INDEX over lookup functions such as VLOOKUP? Answer: The MATCH and INDEX function can perform the function of VLOOKUP and HLOOKUP simultaneously when nested together, while also eliminating the need for look up tables. When using both INDEX and MATCH the user will gain the ability to provide two input variables for a vertical and horizontal axis that will then return a value.

Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Use MATCH and INDEX lookup functions 102) What is the difference between advanced filtering and database functions?

Answer: Advanced filtering and database functions share a similar trait, in that both require criteria information to manipulate data. The difference between the advanced filtering and database functions is that it can only filter data, while database functions perform calculations based on the filtering of data.

Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Use advanced filtering 103) What is the purpose of an amortization table?

Answer: An amortization table is a schedule that calculates the interest, principal repayment, and remaining balance of a loan. The schedule can be used for budgeting and estimation of savings in early repayment. For example, an amortization table could be used to determine total interest savings in paying $100.00 extra per month on a loan.

Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Create a loan amortization table

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 8 Statistical Functions: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) Which of the following is NOT a math and statistical function?

A) COUNTIF B) AVERAGEIF C) SUMIF D) MEDIANIF Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 2) When manually typing criteria such as a date in a function, you must enclose the criteria with ________.

A) number signs (#) B) quotation marks (") C) ampersands (@) D) asterisks (*) Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 3) Which of the following functions assigns the same rank for duplicate values?

A) RANK B) RANK.AVG C) RANK.EQ D) RANK.DUP Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 4) The QUARTILE.EXC functions returns values in the range: ________.

A) 0 to 4 B) 1 to 4 C) 0 to 3 D) 1 to 3 Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) The ________ function measures the dispersion of the sample data around the mean.

A) CORREL B) FREQUENCY C) STDEV.S D) VAR.S Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Descriptive Statistical Functions 6) Which of the following is NOT a descriptive statistical function?

A) DAVERAGE B) STDEV.P C) VAR.S D) FREQUENCY Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Descriptive Statistical Functions 7) To test to see if there is a relationship between test scores and attendance, you would use the ________ function.

A) STDEV.S B) CORREL C) STDEV.P D) FREQUENCY Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Descriptive Statistical Functions 8) Which of the following is NOT an Analysis Toolpak tool?

A) Analysis of variance B) Covariance C) Histogram D) Standard deviation Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Inferential Functions 9) To perform an analysis of variance, you use the ________ tool.

A) ANOVA B) VAR C) CORREL D) COVARIANCE Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Inferential Functions

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) To analyze the trend between SAT scores and attendance, you would calculate the ________.

A) median B) standard deviation C) covariance D) variance Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Inferential Functions 11) To calculate the number of high school teachers that were hired before 1/1/2005, you would use the COUNT function.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 12) The SUMIF function is used when finding a total having more than one criterion.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 13) When identical values exist, the RANK.AVG function displays the average rank.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Math and Statistical Functions 14) A sample dataset is a smaller portion of the population dataset.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Descriptive Statistical Functions 15) To determine percentage of absences in the ranges 0, 1 to 5, and more than 6, you would use the FREQUENCY function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Descriptive Statistical Functions 16) The Analysis Toolpak is a plug-in that has to be added to Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Inferential Functions 17) A PivotChart is a visual display of tabulated frequencies.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Inferential Functions

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 8 Statistical Functions 1) Which of the following is not a statistical function?

A) AVERAGEIF B) MAX C) COUNTIFS D) DSUM Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 2) Which of the following functions is best suited to add numbers based on one condition?

A) SUMIFS B) SUMIF C) COUNTIF D) COUNTIFS Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 3) Which of the following functions is best suited to count numbers based on multiple conditions?

A) SUMIF B) COUNTIF C) COUNTIFS D) SUMIFS Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 4) How many condition arguments can be defined with the SUMIF function?

A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) unlimited Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Which of the following functions will use average values to determine the rank of a number within a list if duplicate values are present?

A) RANK.EQ B) RANK.AVG C) RANK D) PERCENTILE Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 6) Which of the following functions will rank two values evenly if there is a duplicate value present?

A) RANK.EQ B) RANK.AVG C) RANK D) PERCENTILE Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 7) Identify the statistical function used if the rank value returned for duplicate values was 8.5?

A) RANK.AVG B) RANK.EQ C) RANK.SP D) RANK Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 8) What does the order argument of the RANK.EQ function define?

A) The lowest ranked value B) The ranking stop value C) The order in which numbers are ranked D) The ranking order scale Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 9) Which function is best suited to determine a student's test score percentile based on all class scores?

A) RANK.AVG B) PERCENTRANK.EXC C) AVERAGE D) AVERAGEIFS Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Which of the following functions will exclude quartiles 0 and 4 in its calculations?

A) QUARTILE.INC B) QUARTILE.EXC C) QUARTILE D) PERCENTILE.EXC Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 11) Which function is best suited to calculate quartiles including quartiles 0 and 4?

A) QUARTILE.EXC B) QUARTILE.INC C) QUART D) RANK.AVG Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 12) When using the QUARTILE.INC function which quartile would include the lowest value in the dataset?

A) 0 B) 1 C) 2 D) 3 Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 13) When using the QUARTILE.INC function which quartile would include the highest value in the dataset?

A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4 Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 14) The second quartile of both QUARTILE.EXC and QUARTILE.INC defines what percentile?

A) 25th B) 50th C) 75th D) 0 Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) Which of the following percentiles is excluded when using the PERCENTILE.EXC function?

A) 0 B) 25th C) 50th D) 75th Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 16) Which of the following functions will determine the standard deviation of a sample?

A) STDEV.P B) STDEV.S C) STDEVA D) VARA Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 17) Which of the following will determine the variance of a population?

A) VARA B) VAR.P C) VAR.S D) VARPA Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 18) Which function is best suited to determine how the data set is spread around the mean?

A) COVARIANCE B) CORREL C) STDEV.P D) VARA Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 19) Which of the following functions will help determine the strength of a relationship between two variables?

A) VARPA B) STDEV.P C) CORREL D) VAR.P Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Which of the following is not a function for measuring central tendency?

A) CORREL B) STDEV.P C) VAR.P D) SUMIFS Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 21) When using an array of data with the FREQUENCY function, the following keystroke is required.

A) Ctrl+Alt+Delete B) Ctrl+Shift+Delete C) Ctrl+Shift+Enter D) Ctrl+Enter Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 22) Which of the following tools is not included in the Analysis ToolPak? A) Anova: Single Factor B) Correlation C) Rank Average D) Covariance Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 23) The Analysis ToolPak can be activated in: A) Formula tab.

B) Excel Options.

C) Review tab.

D) Developer tab.

Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 24) Which feature of the Analysis ToolPak is best suited to determine if samples were taken from the same population?

A) Correlation B) Histogram C) Descriptive Statistics D) ANOVA Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) Which of the following is not an ANOVA calculation that can be performed?

A) Single-factor B) Two-factor with replication C) Two-factor without replication D) Two-tail Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 26) Which of the following is not included in an ANOVA summary report?

A) SS B) df C) MS D) TF Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 27) Which data analysis tool is best suited to measure how two sets of data vary simultaneously?

A) Histogram B) Correlation C) Covariance D) Variance Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE 28) Which of the following functions is best suited to calculate the covariance of a population?

A) VARPA B) COVAR C) COVARIANCE.S D) COVARIANCE.P Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE 29) When using the CORREL function a value of 1 would indicate: A) a weak relationship.

B) a mild relationship.

C) a strong relationship.

D) no relationship.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

30) When active, where does the Analysis ToolPak appear?

A) Data tab B) Formulas tab C) View tab D) Insert tab Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 31) Which of the following functions is best suited to determine the standard deviation of a sample including logical values and text?

A) STDEVA B) STDEV.P C) STDEV.S D) STDEVPA Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 32) Which of the following functions does not base its calculations on data samples?

A) STDEV.S B) VARPA C) VAR.S D) STDEVA Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 33) Which of the following functions is best suited to calculate the variance of a population including logical values and text?

A) VAR.P B) VARA C) VARPA D) VAR.S Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 34) When using the CORREL function, a value of .00007 would indicate: A) a weak relationship.

B) a strong relationship.

C) an inverse relationship.

D) no relationship.

Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

35) What function is best suited to determine how often a set of numbers appears within a dataset?

A) SUMIF B) FREQUENCY C) SUMIFS D) AVERAGEIF Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 36) Which of the following is a new statistical function in Excel 2013?

A) Skew.P B) STDEV.P C) VARPA D) CORREL Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 37) Which of the following is included in an ANOVA summary report?

A) F crit B) STDEV C) Correlation D) Covariance Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Perform analysis using the Analysis ToolPak 38) Which function would be best used to determine the rank of each student in a graduating high school class?

A) RANK.EQ B) RANK.AVG C) QUARTILE.EXC D) QUARTILE.INC Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 39) This function is best suited to determine ranks within a data set based on percentile.

A) RANK.EQ B) PERCENTRANK.INC C) RANK.AVG D) PERCENTILE Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

40) When using the QUARTILE.INC function a quartile of 3 represents which percentile?

A) 25th B) 50th C) 75th D) 100th Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 41) Two or more conditions can be used with the SUMIFS function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 42) If the number 0 is entered in the order argument of the RANK.AVG function the numbers will appear in ascending order.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 43) The PERCENTRANK.INC function excludes 0 and 1.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 44) When using the QUARTILE.INC function the 4th quartile would include the highest number value.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 45) The QUARTILE.EXC function excludes quartiles 0 and 4.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 46) STDEV.S calculates the standard deviation of a sample.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 47) VARPA calculates the variance of a population including logical values and text.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

48) A CORREL value of .9 has a strong positive relationship.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 49) The FREQUENCY function can count words.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 50) To complete a FREQUENCY function using an array the keystroke Ctrl+Enter must be used.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 51) By default the Analysis ToolPak is active.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 52) Histogram is a tool of the Analysis ToolPak. Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Perform analysis using the Analysis ToolPak 53) When created using the Analysis ToolPak, histograms cannot be deleted.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Perform analysis using the Analysis ToolPak 54) Histograms can be created on a separate worksheet when using the Analysis ToolPak. Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Perform analysis using the Analysis ToolPak 55) COVARIANCE.S determines how two sets of data from a sample vary simultaneously.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE 56) VAR.P is included in the Analysis ToolPak. Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

57) The Analysis ToolPak appears in the Data tab.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 58) The SUMIF function could be used to add the total salaries of employees over the age of 25 in a dataset.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 59) When using text for criteria in conditional logic functions, the text must be surrounded by double quotation marks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 60) The PERCENTILE.EXC function is the best function to calculate the 25th percentile within a range of values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 61) The PERCENTILE.INC function includes the 0 and 100th percentile.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 62) STDEV.P should be used to calculate standard deviation when all data for a population is present.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 63) In an ANOVA summary report, the degrees of freedom are equal to the number of data points in the sample - 1 (N - 1).

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 64) By default, the FREQUENCY function includes numerical outliers.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

65) The FREQUENCY function will count numbers that are outside the predetermined bins.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 66) The ________ function is best suited to determine the number of high school students under the age of 16.

Answer: COUNTIF Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 67) When using the RANK.AVG function the order argument determines the ________.

Answer: order of values Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 68) The .EXC descriptor in PERCENTRANK.EXC stands for: A) inclusive.

B) increment.

C) expert.

D) exclusive.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 69) A smaller more manageable portion of the population is called a ________.

Answer: sample Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 70) The ________ is the square root of the variance.

Answer: standard deviation Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 71) A ________ is a visual display of tabulated frequencies.

Answer: histogram Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Create a histogram 72) The ________ function returns the gamma value of a data set.

Answer: Gamma Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Create a histogram

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

73) The ________ function calculates the variance of a population.

Answer: VAR.P Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 74) The ________ function determines the strength of a relationship between two datasets.

Answer: CORREL Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 75) The ________ function determines how often a set of numbers appears within a dataset.

Answer: FREQUENCY Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 76) The ________ is an Excel add-in that offers powerful tools for statistical analysis.

Answer: Analysis ToolPak Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 77) ________ is a tool included in the Analysis ToolPak. Answer: Correlation Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak 78) ANOVA stands for ________.

Answer: analysis of variance Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 79) ________ determines how two data sets from a sample vary simultaneously.

Answer: COVARIANCE.S Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE 80) The ________ tool within the Analysis ToolPak can place its output on a blank worksheet.

Answer: histogram Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Create a histogram

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) The ________ function can be used to perform a multiconditional average of data.

A) AVERAGE B) AVERAGEIF C) AVERAGEIFS D) MU Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 82) The ________ function can be used to perform a single condition summary.

Answer: SUMIF Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 83) The ________ of a sample is the summation of the squared deviations divided by the amount of the sample (n - 1).

Answer: Variance Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 84) The ________ is best suited to measure the strength of the relationship between credit score and salary.

Answer: CORREL Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 85) The ________ is a predefined set of numerical values that are used to organize and count data using the FREQUENCY function.

Answer: Bins_Array Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 86) The ________ is the range of cells that contain the values that are being evaluated for frequency of occurrence when using the FREQUENCY function.

Answer: Data_Array Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 87) ________ is a statistical hypothesis test that helps determine if samples of data were taken from the same population.

Answer: Analysis of variance Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA)

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

88) ________ a measure of how two sets of data vary simultaneously.

Answer: Covariance Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE 89) ________ calculates the variance of a sample.

Answer: VAR.S Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 90) The ________ function is best suited to return the rank as a percentage of students within a high school.

Answer: PERCENTRANK.INC Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. SUM II. AVERAGE III. MIN IV. MAX V. MEDIAN A. Returns the largest number in a range of cells B. Returns the number in the middle of the set of given numbers C. Returns the arithmetic mean of its arguments D. Returns the smallest number in a range of cells E. Adds all the numbers in a range of cells Answer: E,C,D,A,B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 92) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. SUMIF II. AVERAGEIF III. COUNTIF IV. SUMIFS V. AVERAGEIFS A. Counts the number of cells within a range that meet the given condition.

B. Adds the cells specified by a given set of conditions or criteria C. Finds the mean for the cells specified by a given set of conditions or criteria.

D. Adds the cells specified by on a given condition or criteria E. Finds the mean for the cells specified by a given condition or criteria Answer: D,E,A,B,C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Use conditional math and statistical functions 15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. RANK.EQ II. QUARTILE.INC III. RANK.AVG IV. PERCENTRANK.EXC V. PERCENTRANK.INC A. Identifies the rank of a value but assigns an average rank when identical values exist.

B. Displays a value's rank as a percentile of the range of data in the dataset C. Returns a value's rank as a percent excluding 0 and 1 D. Identifies the value at a specific quartile for a dataset, including quartile 0 for the lowest value and quartile 4 for the highest value in the dataset E. Identifies a value's rank within a list of values Answer: E,D,A,C,B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions 94) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Quartile 0 II. Quartile 1 III. Quartile 2 IV. Quartile 3 V. Quartile 4 A. Highest value within the dataset. Identical to using the MAX function. Allowed in QUART ILE.INC only B. Identifies the value at the 75th percentile C. Identifies the value at the 50th percentile D. Lowest value in the dataset. Identical to using the MIN function. Allowed in QUARTILE.INC only E. Identifies the value at the 25th percentile Answer: D,E,C,B,A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Calculate relative standing with statistical functions

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Population II. Sample III. Standard deviation IV. Variance V. STDEV.P A. Calculates the standard deviation of a population B. The measure of how far the data sample is spread around the mean, in the original units of measure C. A data set that contains all the data you would like to evaluate D. A smaller, more manageable portion of the population E. A measure of a dataset's dispersion, such as the difference between the highest and lowest test scores in a class Answer: C,D,B,E,A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 96) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. STDEVA II. STDEVPA III. STDEV.P IV. VAR.P V. VAR.S A. Variance of a population B. Variance of a sample C. Standard deviation of a population including logical values and text D. Standard deviation of a sample including logical values and text E. Standard deviation of a population Answer: D,C,E,A,B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

97) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. CORREL II. FREQUENCY III. VARPA IV. VARA V. STDEV.S A. Variance of a population including logical values and text B. Descriptive statistic function in Excel that determines the frequency distribution of a dataset.

C. Standard deviation of a sample D. Helps determine the strength of a relationship between two variables E. Variance of a sample including logical values and text Answer: D,B,A,E,C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 98) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. ANOVA II. Analysis ToolPak III. Covariance IV. Inferential statistics V. Histogram A. Helps make predictions about the characteristics of a population B. A measure of how two sets of data vary simultaneously C. A visual display of tabulated frequencies D. Offers 19 tools that fit a variety of needs across all professions.

E. A statistical hypothesis test that helps determine if samples of data were taken from the same population Answer: E,D,B,A,C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Load the Analysis ToolPak

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

99) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. SS II. df III. MS IV. F V. P-value A. Probability of population being similar to the sample B. Equal to the mean square between/mean square within C. The number of data points in the sample -1, (N -1) D. The means of the sample squared E. Sum of the squares of the data points in the sample Answer: E,C,D,B,A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Perform analysis of variance (ANOVA) 100) Match the following terms with the corresponding description.

I. Binom.dist.range II. Gamma III. Gauss IV. PHI V. Skew.P A. Returns gamma value B. Returns the skewness of a distribution based on a population C. Returns the value of the density function for a standard normal distribution D. Returns 0.5 less than the standard normal cumulative distribution E. Calculates the probability of trial result using a binomial distribution Answer: E,A,D,C,B Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Create a histogram 101) What are the benefits of using the Analysis ToolPakover traditional statistical functions in Excel?

Answer: Many of the calculations that are incorporated in the Analysis ToolPak are also included as traditional functions within Excel. The benefits of using the Analysis ToolPak are in ease of use and greater flexibility in output options.

Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Perform analysis using the Analysis ToolPak

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

102) What is the difference between calculating standard deviation of a population versus a sample?

Answer: When calculating standard deviation the ideal scenario would require all data from the entire group in question. In many situations this not possible, for example calculating the standard deviation of age for a city. Acquiring all information from every inhabitant would be difficult. When faced with this situation, statisticians often take a sample of the entire population to perform calculations. In Excel the function STDEV.S would be used for samples and STDEV.P would be used for a population.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Measure central tendency 103) What is the difference between COVARIANCE and ANOVA? Answer: COVARIANCE is a statistical function that measures how two sets of data vary simultaneously. It is calculated by taking the average of each product of the deviation of a data point. Analysis of Variance, ANOVA, determines how close a sample dataset is to the actual population. While there is both a COVAR function and COVARIANCE option in the Analysis ToolPak, ANOVA can only be completed manually or by using the Analysis ToolPak. Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Calculate COVARIANCE

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 9 Multiple-Sheet Workbook Management: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) To group adjacent worksheets, you: A) click the first worksheet tab, press and hold Ctrl, and click the last worksheet tab.

B) click the first worksheet tab, press and hold Shift, and click the last worksheet tab.

C) click the first worksheet tab and double-click the last worksheet tab.

D) click the first worksheet tab and right-click the last worksheet tab.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Multiple Worksheets 2) To examine multiple worksheets in the same workbook at the same time, you use New Window and Arrange All located on the ________ tab.

A) PAGE LAYOUT B) VIEW C) INSERT D) DESIGN Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: Multiple Worksheets 3) In a 3-D reference, worksheets references are separated from their cell references by a(n) ________.

A) single quotation mark (') B) double quotation mark (") C) exclamation mark (!)

D) period (.)

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: 3-D Formulas and Linked Workbooks 4) Which of the following references is written incorrectly?

A) =[e09h2Indianapolis_LastFirst.xlsx]Yearly Totals!$F$3 B) ="October Sales"!E3+"November Sales"!E3+"December Sales"!E3 C) ="[e09h2Bloomington_LastFirst.xlsx]Yearly Totals"!$F$3 D) =SUM("Qtr1:Qtr4"!E3) Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: 3-D Formulas and Linked Workbooks

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) When referencing a worksheet in another workbook, the workbook name is enclosed in ________.

A) parentheses ( ) B) brackets [ ] C) braces { } D) double quotation marks " " Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: 3-D Formulas and Linked Workbooks 6)

In the figure shown above, ________.

A) A1 is a dependent cell and B1 is a precedent cell of D1 B) A1 is precedent cell and B1 is a dependent cell of D1 C) A1 and B1 are dependent cells of D1 D) A1 and B1 are precedent cells of D1 Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation 7) When Excel detects an error in a formula: A) the cell containing the formula is surrounded in a green border.

B) a green triangle is displayed in the top-left corner of the cell containing the formula.

C) the cell containing the formula is displayed with a light green fill.

D) the text in the cell containing the formula is displayed in bold green.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation 8) A formula that references itself is called a(n) ________ reference.

A) absolute B) reliant C) circular D) dependent Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

9) A(n) ________ window makes it possible to monitor cells not immediately visible on the screen.

A) Watch B) Data C) Observation D) Inspection Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation 10) You would use ________ to monitor data input and display an appropriate message if a user enters erroneous data.

A) a data filter B) conditional formatting C) data validation D) error checking Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation 11) When worksheets are grouped, [Group] is displayed in the titles bar immediately after the file name.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Multiple Worksheets 12) To ungroup worksheets, right-click any one of the grouped worksheets' tabs and click Ungroup Sheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Multiple Worksheets 13) A hyperlink to a worksheet always references cell A1 of that worksheet.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: 3-D Formulas and Linked Workbooks 14) When linking to an external workbook, the workbook name is surrounded by single quotation marks.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: 3-D Formulas and Linked Workbooks

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) When using Trace Precedents and Trace Dependents, tracer arrows display showing the relationship between cells and formulas.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation 16) When creating a data validation rule, you can specify both input message and an alert.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Formula Audits and Data Validation

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 9 Multiple-Sheet Workbook Management 1) When worksheets are grouped, which of the following is true?

A) [Group] appears in the title bar B) The worksheets are locked C) A lock appears in the title bar D) The worksheets cannot be edited Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 2) To group all worksheets: A) right-click a cell and select All. B) click Group on the Data tab.

C) right-click a worksheet tab and click Select All Sheets.

D) click Group on the View tab.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 3) To group adjacent worksheets: A) click Group on the Data tab.

B) click the first worksheet tab, press and hold Shift, and then click the last worksheet tab.

C) click Group on the View tab.

D) right-click a worksheet tab and click Select All Sheets.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 4) To group nonadjacent worksheet tabs: A) right-click a worksheet tab and click Select All Sheets.

B) click Group on the View tab.

C) click the first worksheet tab, press and hold Shift, and then click the last worksheet tab.

D) click the first worksheet tab, press and hold Ctrl, and then click each additional worksheet tab.

Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) To ungroup worksheets: A) click a worksheet tab for a sheet that is not grouped.

B) press Esc. C) click Ungroup on the Formulas tab.

D) click Ungroup on the Data tab.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 6) When worksheets are grouped which of the following actions will not occur across all worksheets?

A) Data entry B) Structural changes C) Formatting D) Conditional formatting Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 7) Which of the following actions will open another window of the current workbook?

A) Click the Formulas tab, and then click New Window in the Manage group B) Click the View tab, and then click New Window in the Window group C) Click the Data tab, and then click New Window in the Manage group D) Click the View tab, and then click New Window in the Manage group Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 8) Which of the following is not an option when arranging windows?

A) Tiled B) Horizontal C) Stacked D) Cascade Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 9) Which of the following is not a way to remove panes from a window that has been split?

A) Double-click the split bar B) Drag a vertical split bar to the left or right edge of the worksheet window C) Click Split in the Window group D) Click Remove Split in the View tab Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Which of the following is true when synchronize scrolling is enabled?

A) Side by side worksheets will scroll at the same rate B) Side by side worksheets will scroll at a different rate C) Side by side worksheets will not scroll D) Side by side worksheets are locked Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 11) Which of the following cannot be accessed via a hyperlink in Excel?

A) External workbook B) Different worksheet C) Web page D) Another program Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 12) In Excel, hyperlinks appear as: A) blue text with a blue underline.

B) red text with a blue underline.

C) black text.

D) blue text with a black underline.

Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 13) Visited hyperlinks in Excel appear as: A) blue text.

B) black text.

C) yellow text.

D) purple text.

Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 14) To edit or remove a hyperlink: A) left-click it, and then select Edit Hyperlink to open the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.

B) right-click it, and then click Delete.

C) right-click it and then select Edit Hyperlink to open the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.

D) double-click it and then click Delete.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) This should be used when referencing cells on another worksheet.

A) Function B) Reference C) Formula D) 3-D reference Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 16) Which of the following is the proper format for a 3-D reference?

A) Worksheet Name!RangeOfCells B) 'Worksheet Name'!RangeOfCells C) "Worksheet Name"!RangeOfCells D) 'Worksheet Name!RangeOfCells' Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 17) Which of the following functions cannot be used as a 3-D formula?

A) SUM B) PMT C) AVERAGE D) MAX Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 18) What is the best method to consolidate three workbooks into another workbook?

A) Copy and paste B) External cell references C) 3-D formulas D) Web query Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 19) What is the proper format for creating an external reference with no spaces in the file name located in the same folder as the destination file?

A) [WorkbookName]"WorksheetName"!RangeOfCells B) [WorkbookName]'WorksheetName'!RangeOfCells C) WorksheetName!RangeOfCells D) [WorkbookName]WorksheetName!RangeOfCells Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) What is the proper format of an external reference to a workbook or worksheet thats name contains spaces; source and destination files are in the same folder?

A) ''[WorkbookName]Worksheet''!Cell B) Worksheet'!Cell C) [WorkbookName]Worksheet!Cell D) '[WorkbookName]Worksheet'!Cell Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 21) What is the proper format of an external reference to a workbook or worksheet thats name does not contains spaces; source and destination files are in the same folder.

A) ''[WorkbookName]Worksheet''!Cell B) [WorkbookName]Worksheet!Cell C) '[WorkbookName]Worksheet'!Cell D) Worksheet'!Cell Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 22) What happens when data that is externally linked is edited and both the source and destination file are open?

A) The links will automatically update B) The links will not update C) A security prompt appears D) There will be no change Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 23) What happens if you rename the source file of a worksheet that is used in an external reference?

A) The link will automatically update B) A prompt to manually update the link appears C) The linked data will appear in red text D) The workbook will not open Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Link workbooks

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

24) All of the following could produce a #NAME? error with the exception of which one?

A) Misspelled word B) Invalid range name C) Invalid arguments in a function D) Invalid function name Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 25) What error will cause #NUM! to appear?

A) Invalid arguments in a function B) Misspelled name C) Deleted cell reference D) Invalid range name Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 26) Which of the following would cause the error #VALUE! to appear?

A) Misspelled word B) Deleted cell reference C) Incorrect data used in an argument D) Invalid range name Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 27) Which of the following would cause the error #DIV/0! to appear?

A) Misspelled word B) Formula attempts to divide a value by zero or an empty cell C) Invalid range name D) Invalid arguments in the function Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 28) Which of the following functions does not contain a syntax error?

A) =avg(B1:B9) B) =AVERAG(B1:B9) C) =AVERAGE(B1;B9) D) =AVERAGE(B1:B9) Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

29) Which of the following functions does not contain a logic error?

A) =IF(0>0, "yes". "no") B) =IF(B5>B5,"yes","no") C) =IF(B6/0>C6/0,"yes","no") D) =IF(B6>C6,"Yes","No") Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 30) Which of the following is not a formula auditing tool?

A) Trace Precedents B) Watch Window C) Calculation Options D) Trace Dependents Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 31) In the formula =B2*B3 is located in cell C3, which cell is the dependent cell?

A) B2 B) B3 C) C3 D) C1 Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 32) If the formula =B2*B3 is located in cell C3, which cell is not a precedent?

A) C3 B) B2 C) B3 D) C1 Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 33) What is indicated by blue arrows when tracing precedents?

A) Cells with errors B) Cells with validation rules C) Cells with no errors D) Cells with comments Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

34) What is indicated by red arrows when tracing precedents?

A) Cells that cause errors B) Cells with validation rules C) Cells with no errors D) Cells with comments Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 35) Which function is best used to return a value if an error exists in a cell?

A) IF B) GETERROR C) IFERROR D) VALIDATE Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 36) What auditing tool is best used to monitor the changes in a cell over time?

A) Trace precedents B) Watch Window C) Trace dependents D) Formula bar Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Set up a Watch Window 37) What formula auditing tool can be used to control the data input from the user?

A) IFERROR B) Data validation C) Watch Window D) Trace dependents Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Validate data 38) Which of the following is not a data validation stop style?

A) Lookup B) Stop C) Warning D) Information Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Validate data

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

39) What happens if a user violates a validation rule and a stop style is applied?

A) The user will not be able to continue B) The user will be able to continue C) The user can choose to ignore the error D) The user will be able to edit the rule Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Validate data 40) When is the input message displayed in a cell that contains a validation rule?

A) When the user violates a rule B) When the cell is clicked C) When the workbook is opened D) When the cell is double-clicked Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Validate data 41) Conditional formatting can be applied to a set of grouped worksheets.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 42) When worksheets are grouped all structural changes will be copied across worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 43) Worksheets can be hidden to help manage available screen space when dealing with large files.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 44) When opening a second window of the current workbook :2 will appear after the title.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 45) The split bar gives the user the ability to view two different workbooks simultaneously.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

46) When arranging windows, tiled is not an option.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 47) Images can be used as hyperlinks Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 48) A hyperlink cannot be used to access an e-mail address.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 49) Unvisited hyperlinks appear blue with a blue underline.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 50) To remove a hyperlink, right-click it, and then select Link Options.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 51) A 3-D reference is a pointer to a cell in another worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 52) OctoberSales.xlsx is an example of CamelCase notation.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 53) The VLOOKUP function can be used to create a 3-D formula.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 54) 3-D formulas automatically update when data is added.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

55) By default, Excel creates absolute cell references in external references.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 56) If the destination file is closed when you change data in the source file, the destination file does automatically update to match the source file.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 57) The #NUM! error indicates an invalid argument used in a function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 58) The #DIV/0! error indicates a misspelled word in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 59) Dependent cells contain formulas independent of other cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 60) The IFERROR function will perform an action if the current value in a cell produces an error.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 61) The Watch Window will update as user defined cells change.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Set up a Watch Window 62) When a stop is chosen as the error style using data validation, the user will not be able to continue.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Validate data

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

63) When information is chosen as the error style using data validation, the user will be able to input the incorrect data.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Validate data 64) When a worksheet is split, any changes made to one pane updates the entire worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 65) By default automatic updates of links are disabled.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 66) ________ is the process of selecting two or more worksheets.

Answer: Grouping Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 67) When worksheets are grouped ________ appears in the title bar.

Answer: [Group] Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 68) ________ is/are not supported when worksheets are grouped.

Answer: Conditional formatting Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets 69) ________ is the process of dividing a worksheet window into two or four resizable windows.

Answer: Splitting Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 70) A ________ is an electronic marker that connects to another location.

Answer: hyperlink Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 71) If defined by the user, an optional ________ appears when the mouse pointer hovers over a hyperlink.

Answer: ScreenTip Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

72) A________ is a pointer to a cell in another worksheet.

Answer: 3-D reference Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 73) NovemberFile.xlsx is an example of ________.

Answer: CamelCase notation Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 74) ''[South Bend.xlsx]Qtr3''!A1 is an example of a (n) ________.

Answer: external reference Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 75) By default automatic updates of links are ________.

Answer: disabled Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 76) If a workbook that is referenced is lost or moved the error ________ will be displayed.

Answer: Error: Source not found Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 77) The error ________ will display when a formula attempts to divide a value by zero or an empty cell.

Answer: #DIV/0!

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 78) The error ________ will display when an invalid argument is used in a function.

Answer: #NUM! Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 79) ________ errors are the result of a syntactically correct formula but logically incorrect construction, which produces inaccurate results.

Answer: Logic Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 80) ________ errors occur because a formula or function violates correct construction, such as a misspelled function name or illegal use of an operator.

Answer: Syntax Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

81) ________ is/are a set of tools that enable you to display or trace relationships for formula cells, show formulas, check for errors, and evaluate formulas.

Answer: Formula auditing Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 82) In the formula =C3*C5 in which the results are displayed in cell C6, ________ is the dependent cell.

Answer: C6 Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 83) When using the tracer arrows cell with no errors have ________ arrows.

Answer: blue Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 84) When using the tracer arrows cell with errors have ________ arrows.

Answer: red Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 85) ________ is a logical function that checks a cell to determine if that cell contains an error or if a formula will result in an error.

Answer: IFERROR Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 86) Using a(n) ________ is best suited to monitor the changes in a cell as input value update.

Answer: Watch Window Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Set up a Watch Window 87) ________ enables you to control the data that can be entered into a cell.

Answer: Data validation Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 88) When a(n) ________ style error alert is used, the user will be able to enter data even if it violates the data validation rule.

Answer: Information Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Validate data

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

89) A ________ is a file that that contains original data that you need elsewhere.

Answer: source file Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Insert hyperlinks 90) ________ is a file containing a pointer to receive data from the source files.

Answer: destination file Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Link workbooks 91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Data validation II. Validation criteria III. Input message IV. Error alert V. Error style A. Descriptive text or instructions for data entry that can be entered in the Data Validation dialog box B. A message that displays when a user enters invalid data in a cell that has a validation rule applied to it C. Controls the icon that appears with the error message D. Enables you to control the data that can be entered into a cell E. Rules that dictate the type of data that can be entered in a cell Answer: D,E,A,B,C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Validate data 92) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Watch Window II. IFERROR III. Formula auditing IV. Precedents V. Dependents A. Cells that are referenced in a formula B. Contain formulas that refer to other cells C. A logical function that checks a cell to determine if that cell contains an error or if a formula will result in an error D. A set of tools that enable you to display or trace relationships for formula cells, show formulas, check for errors, and evaluate formulas E. Enables you to create a small window so you can conveniently inspect, audit, or confirm formula calculations involving cells not immediately visible on the screen Answer: E,C,D,A,B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. #DIV/0!

II. #NAME? III. #N/A IV. #NULL! V. #NUM A. Invalid arguments used in a function B. Incorrect range separator Formula requires cell ranges to intersect and they do not C. Misspelled or invalid range name or function name D. Function is missing one or more required arguments, or VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP, or MATCH functions do not return a match E. Formula attempts to divide a value by zero or an empty cell Answer: E,C,D,B,A Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 94) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. [Indianapolis.xlsx]Qtr3!A1 II. '[South Bend.xlsx]Qtr3'!A1 III. '[Bloomington.xlsx]Qtr 3 Sales'!A1 IV. 'C:\Data[Indianapolis.xlsx]Sheet1'!A1 V. B3 A. External reference in which Worksheet name contains spaces; source and destination files are in the same folder B. Cell reference C. External reference in which Workbook and worksheet names do not contain spaces; source and destination files are in the same folder.

D. External reference in which Workbook or worksheet name contains spaces; source and destination files are in the same folder.

E. External reference in which source workbook is in a different folder than the destination workbook.

Answer: C,A,D,E,B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Link workbooks

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. =SUM(''Qtr1:Qtr4''!E3) II. [Indianapolis.xlsx]Qtr3!A1 III. =IFERROR(D2/E2, "Error in data") IV. Watch Window V. Precedent A. IFERROR function B. Cells that are referenced in a formula C. Enables you to create a small window so you can conveniently inspect, audit, or confirm formula calculations involving cells not immediately visible on the screen D. External reference E. 3-D Formula Answer: E,D,A,C,B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 96) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Data Validation II. Stop style III. Warning style IV. Information style V. Circle text A. Prevents the user from entering invalid data B. Accepts invalid data but warns user that data are invalid C. Accepts invalid data but provides information to user D. Circles invalid text as defined by data validation rules E. Enables you to control the data that can be entered into a cell Answer: E,A,B,C,D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

97) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. #REF! II. IFERROR III. #VALUE! IV. #NUM! V. #N/A A. A logical function that checks a cell to determine if that cell contains an error or if a formula will result in an error B. Incorrect type of data used in an argument, such as referring to a cell that contains text instead of a value C. Function is missing one or more required arguments D. Reference to cell that contains no data or deleted data E. Invalid arguments used in a function Answer: D,A,B,E,C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 98) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Grouping II. Ungrouping III. 3-d reference IV. External reference V. Split bar A. Divides a worksheet into panes B. The process of selecting two or more worksheets so that you can perform the same action at the same time on all selected worksheets C. The process of deselecting grouped worksheets so that actions performed on one sheet do not affect other worksheets D. A pointer to a cell in another worksheet E. A link between source and destination files Answer: B,C,D,E,A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

99) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Fill across worksheet II. Grouping III. Ungrouping IV. Hide V. Unhide A. The process of deselecting grouped worksheets so that actions performed on one sheet do not affect other worksheets B. The process of selecting two or more worksheets so that you can perform the same action at the same time on all selected worksheets C. Restrict the view of a worksheet making it not visible D. Reinstating the view of a worksheet making it visible E. Copy new data or formatting across several worksheets at the same time Answer: E,B,A,C,D Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Manage windows and workspaces 100) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Source file II. Syntax error III. Hyperlink IV. Destination file V. Logic error A. An electronic marker that, when clicked, connects to another location in the same or a different worksheet, another file, a Web page, or an e-mail B. A file that contains original data C. A file containing a pointer to receive data from the source files D. An error that occurs because a formula or function violates correct construction E. The result of a syntactically correct formula but logically incorrect construction, which produces inaccurate results Answer: B,D,A,C,E Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas 101) What are the benefits of grouping worksheets?

Answer: Grouping worksheets gives the ability to complete various tasks across multiple sheets simultaneously. This saves time when completing simple tasks such as basic functions and formatting. This also improves accuracy by reducing the opportunity for human error in repetitive tasks.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Work with grouped worksheets

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

102) What are the benefits of using 3-D formulas?

Answer: 3-D formulas give the user the ability to perform basic aggregate calculation to the same cell across multiple workbooks while reducing the size of the required function. For example the function =SUM(QTR1!E3, QTR2!E3, QTR3!E3, QTR4!E3) would be replaced with =SUM('Qtr1:Qtr4'!E3).

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert a 3-D formula 103) What is the difference between a precedent and dependent cell?

Answer: Every formula is a relationship comprised of both precedent and dependent cells.

Precedent cells contain values that are referenced in a formula. In contrast, dependent cells contain values that depend on precedent data.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Audit formulas

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 10 Imports, Web Queries, and XML: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) When creating a Web query, tables in the Web page are indicated by: A) a solid yellow border.

B) the table text displayed in yellow.

C) the table highlighted in yellow.

D) a yellow selection icon with a right-pointing arrow.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: External Data 2) The From Text, From Access, and From Web buttons are located on the ________ tab.

A) INSERT B) DATA C) REVIEW D) IMPORT Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 1: External Data 3) The ________ function is used to change NEW YORK to New York.

A) CONCATENATE B) UPPER C) LOWER D) PROPER Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Text Manipulation 4) To change a social security number in cell A1 from the 506-32-4462 format to 506324462 in cell B1, you would type ________.

A) =SWAP(A1,"-","") B) =EXCHANGE(A1,"-","") C) =SUBSTITUTE(A1,"-","") D) =REPLACE(A1,"-","") Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Text Manipulation

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) You can use ________ in conjunction with data in existing columns to separate the data into distinct columns.

A) Format Painter B) Flash Fill C) Copy with Paste Special D) the fill handle Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Text Manipulation 6)

The text shown above represents information structured using ________ syntax.

A) Visual Basic B) Excel macro C) HTML D) XML Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: XML 7) In the expression, <High>270.65</High>, the <High> and </High> are referred to as ________.

A) tags B) markers C) delimiters D) identifiers Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: XML 8) When importing a text file into Excel, you must specify a delimiter.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: External Data 9) Data imported from an Access table is formatted as a range of cells.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: External Data 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) A Web query does not import the data, instead it creates a link to the Web page, which can be refreshed.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: External Data 11) Using the Convert Text to Columns Wizard is similar to using the Text Import Wizard.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Text Manipulation 12) An XML document can be edited in Notepad.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: XML 13) When an XML document is edited, changes to the imported data are automatically updated in Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: XML

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 10 Imports, Web Queries, and XML 1) Which of the following is a file type that cannot be imported into Excel?

A) PDF B) Text file C) CAD D) TIFF Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 2) Which of the following describes importing data into Excel but do not maintaining a link to the original data source?

A) Embed B) Hyperlink C) External reference D) 3-D formula Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 3) Which of the following is a not an Excel file type?

A) .xls B) .xlsx C) text file D) .xltm Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 4) Which of the following file types uses tabs to separate data into columns?

A) jpeg B) pdf C) csv D) tab-delimited Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) This file type uses commas to separate data into columns.

A) jpeg B) pdf C) csv D) tab-delimited Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 6) When importing an Access database table, Excel: A) imports the data as text.

B) formats the data in default table style.

C) imports the data in delimited format.

D) imports the data in CSV format.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 7) Which of the following sources cannot be imported into Excel?

A) SQL Server B) Analysis Services C) Direct image files from a web page D) Windows Azure Marketplace Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 8) Which of the following tools is best suited for setting up a connection to a table on a Web page?

A) Hyperlink B) Web query C) 3-D formula D) Web inquiry Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 9) Where are Web query tools and options located?

A) Formulas tab B) Insert tab C) Data tab D) Review tab Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create a Web query

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) When creating a Web query which option preserves all original formatting?

A) Rich text B) HTML formatting C) XML D) Style Sheet Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 11) Which of the following is not a limitation when working with Web queries?

A) Web sites that require logins B) URLs that change C) Data that is not formatted as a table D) Tables that contain foreign characters Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 12) Which of the following options will refresh connections within an Excel workbook?

A) Click Refresh All on the Connections group B) Click Refresh in the Backstage area C) Click anywhere in the connected data D) Click Refresh in the Insert tab Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manage connections 13) What message is displayed in the status bar when a connection is being updated?

A) Connections updating B) Running background query C) Updating connections D) Status - updated Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Manage connections 14) Where can all connections in a workbook be viewed or edited?

A) Insert tab B) Status bar C) Workbook Connections dialog box D) Formulas tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manage connections

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) Which of the following are settings that control how imported data in cells connect to their source data?

A) Import settings B) Connection properties C) Link settings D) Data range properties Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manage connections 16) Which feature is best suited to split imported text into multiple columns?

A) Import Text Wizard B) Convert Text to Columns Wizard C) Import Wizard D) Text tool Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Convert text to columns 17) Where is the Text to Columns Wizard located in Excel?

A) Data tab B) Insert tab C) Formulas tab D) Backstage Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Convert text to columns 18) Which of the following functions does not manipulate text?

A) CONCATENATE B) PROPER C) UPPER D) INDEX Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 19) What is the purpose of the CONCATENATE function?

A) Counts the characters of a text string B) Splits text strings C) Joins text strings D) Transposes text from columns to rows Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) What is the maximum number of strings that can be manipulated with the CONCATENATE function?

A) 25 B) 125 C) 200 D) 255 Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 21) Which of the following is an alternative to using the CONCATENATE function?

A) & B) + C) SUM D) : Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 22) Which function is best suited to capitalize the first letter of each word in a text string?

A) UPPER B) PROPER C) LOWER D) CONCATENATE Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 23) Which function will convert a text string to all capitals?

A) UPPER B) PROPER C) LOWER D) CONCATENATE Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 24) Which function will convert a text string to lowercase?

A) UPPER B) PROPER C) LOWER D) CONCATENATE Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) Which of the following functions is best suited to replace the word "Doctor" with "Dr." in a text string?

A) UPPER B) CONCATENATE C) LOWER D) SUBSTITUTE Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 26) Which function is best suited to remove extras spaces from the beginning of a text string?

A) UPPER B) LEFT C) TRIM D) SUBSTITUTE Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 27) Which of the following features will automatically complete lists?

A) Flash Fill B) Fill handle C) PivotTables D) Web queries Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 28) What governing body created XML? A) IEEE B) World Wide Web Consortium C) The Computer Science Society D) ICANN Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 29) Which of the following is a required element of XML? A) Tag B) Title C) Link D) Anchor Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

30) Which of the following is not part of XML? A) Start tag B) Element C) Hyperlink D) XML declaration Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 31) Which function is best suited to return the specified number of characters from the end of a text string?

A) RIGHT B) LEFT C) TRIM D) MID Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 32) Which function is best suited to return the specified number of characters from the start of a text string?

A) RIGHT B) LEFT C) TRIM D) MID Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 33) Which of the following is the best option for transferring data between incompatible systems?

A) XHTML B) CSS C) XML D) HTML Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 34) Which of the following applications can be used to create XML documents?

A) Notepad B) Photoshop C) iPhoto D) Illustrator Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

35) Where can XML files be opened in Excel?

A) Open dialog box B) Data tab C) Insert tab D) Formula tab Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Import XML data into Excel 36) Once XML data is imported, where can the data source be manipulated?

A) XML options box B) Developer tab C) View tab D) XML Source task pane Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Import XML data into Excel 37) What is the following syntax <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> A) XHTML B) HTML C) XML declaration D) Tag Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 38) What does XML stand for?

A) Extra Markup Language B) eXtensible Markup Language C) External Markup Language D) Extention Markup Language Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 39) Which of the following is a feature in Excel that can often perform the same task as the PROPER function?

A) CONCATENATE B) Flash Fill C) Fill handle D) INDEX Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

40) Which function is best suited to return the specified number of characters from the middle of a text string?

A) LEFT B) SUBSTITUTE C) MID D) RIGHT Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 41) Importing is the process of inserting external data, data created or stored in another format, into the current application.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 42) You embed the data within a worksheet when you import data and maintain the link to its original source.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 43) Text files can be imported into Excel workbooks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 44) Tab-delimited files use tabs to separate data into columns.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 45) CSV files can be imported into an Excel workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 46) Access database tables cannot be imported into Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 47) Web queries cannot accurately import data from Web sites that are password protected.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

48) Web queries refresh data automatically.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 49) When connections are being refreshed, Excel displays the message "Running background query" in the status bar.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 50) The maximum number of text strings supported by the CONCATENATE function is 255.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 51) The CONCATENATE function could combine the words Microsoft and Excel into one text string.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 52) The LOWER function will capitalize the first letter of a text string.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 53) The UPPER function will capitalize every character of a text string.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 54) The PROPER function will convert every character in a text string to lowercase.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 55) The SUBSTITUTE function will replace the word doctor with Dr. in a text string.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 56) Text functions such as CONCATENATE and UPPER can be nested for more precise results.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

57) Flash Fill can often perform the same tasks as the PROPER function.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 58) Flash Fill can auto fill numerical lists.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 59) Flash Fill is located on the Ribbon.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 60) XML stands for eXtensible Markup Language.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 61) <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> is an XML declaration.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 62) XML documents can be imported into Excel.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Import XML data into Excel 63) XML elements cannot be nested.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 64) Indentation indicates the hierarchy structure in XML. Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 65) <!-- Created June 29 1979 --> is an XML comment.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Import XML data into Excel

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

66) ________ is the process of inserting external data created or stored in another format into the current application.

Answer: Importing Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 67) You ________ data when you import data from an external source without maintaining a link to the original data.

Answer: embed Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 68) A(n) ________ file uses tabs to separate data into columns that can be imported into Excel.

Answer: tab-delimited Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 69) A(n) ________ file uses commas to separate data into columns that can be imported into Excel.

Answer: CSV, comma separated values Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 70) Microsoft Access data tables and ________ can be imported into Excel.

Answer: queries Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 71) A ________ can import data from data tables on a Web page.

Answer: web query Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 72) Web queries cannot import data from Web pages that are ________.

Answer: password protected Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 73) When connections are being refreshed in a workbook the status bar displays the message running a ________ query.

Answer: background Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Manage connections

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

74) ________ are settings that control how imported data in cells connect to their source data.

Answer: Data range properties Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Manage connections 75) The ________ function can join up to 255 text strings.

Answer: CONCATENATE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 76) The ________ function could be used to capitalize the first letter of each word in a text string.

Answer: PROPER Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 77) The ________ function will capitalize all characters in a text string.

Answer: UPPER Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 78) The ________ function will convert all characters in a text string to lowercase.

Answer: LOWER Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 79) The ________ function will replace an older text string with new text.

Answer: SUBSTITUTE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 80) The ________ function removes extra spaces from the beginning and end of a text string.

Answer: TRIM Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 81) ________ is a feature in Excel that can often perform the same tasks as the PROPER and CONCATENATE functions.

Answer: Flash Fill Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Use Flash Fill 82) XML stands for ________ Markup Language.

Answer: eXtensible Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

83) A(n) ________ is a user-defined marker that identifies the beginning or ending of a piece of data in an XML document.

Answer: tag Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 84) The ________ specifies the XML version and character encoding used.

Answer: XML declaration Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 85) When using XML, the ________ contains the name of an element preceded by a slash.

Answer: end tag Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 86) XML files can be opened in Excel by using the ________.

Answer: Open dialog box Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Import XML data into Excel 87) Text can be converted into separated columns using the ________ Wizard.

Answer: Convert Text to Columns Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Convert text to columns 88) A(n) ________ is a data file that contains characters, such as letters, numbers, and symbols, including punctuation and spaces.

Answer: text file Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 89) A(n) ________ is a special character that designates the end of a line and separates data for the next line or row.

Answer: newline character Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 90) Data tables from database programs such as Access and ________ Server can be imported into Excel.

Answer: SQL Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Importing II. Embed III. Text file IV. Delimiters V. Tab-delimited A. Importing external data into Excel but not maintaining a link to the original data source B. Indicated by the .txt file extension C. Special characters that separate data D. Uses tabs to separate data into columns E. The process of inserting external data created or data stored in another format into the current application Answer: E, A, B, C, D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 92) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Text file II. CSV III. Tab-delimited IV. Newline character V. Delimiter A. Comma separated values B. Indicated by the .txt file extension C. Special characters that separate data D. Uses tabs to separate data into columns E. A special character that designates the end of a line and separates data for the next line or row Answer: B, A, D, E, C Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Web query II. Web Query Options dialog box III. Rich text formatting IV. HTML formatting V. Login required A. When completing a Web query, this option maintains full formatting B. When completing a Web query, this option imports text only C. This is not supported by Web queries D. Sets up a connection to a table on a Web page E. Location of Web query properties and options Answer: D, E, B, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 94) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Workbook Connections dialog box II. Running background query III. Data range properties IV. Refresh all V. Connection A. A link between Excel and an external data source B. Updates all information on connected data C. Displays in the status bar when data is being refreshed D. Displays all connections in a workbook E. Contains tools for setting connection properties Answer: D, C, E, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Manage connections 95) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. CONCATENATE II. PROPER III. UPPER IV. LOWER V. SUBSTITUTE A. Capitalizes the first letter of each word in a text string B. Joins up to 255 text strings C. Displays all text in a text string as lowercase D. Displays all text in a text string as uppercase E. Replaces old text in a string with new text Answer: B, A, D, C, E Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

96) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. TRIM II. LEFT III. RIGHT IV. MID V. SUBSTITUTE A. Returns the specified number of characters from the start of a text string B. Returns the specified number of characters from the middle of a text string, based on a starting position and length C. Removes leading and trailing spaces in a text string but maintains spaces between words in a text string D. Returns the specified number of characters from the end of a text string E. Replaces old text in a string with new text Answer: C, A, D, B, E Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions 97) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. XML II. Start tag III. End tag IV. Element V. XML declaration A. Contains the name of an element appearing at the beginning of a tag B. eXtensible Markup Language C. Contains the name of an element and a slash indicating the end of the tag D. A statement at the beginning of an XML document indicating the programming language used E. An object defined in XML Answer: B,A,C,E,D Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

98) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. XML II. Start tag III. End tag IV. Comment V. XML declaration A. <!-- created 7/1/2015 --> B. </Condo> C. <Condo> D. <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?> E. eXtensible Markup Language Answer: E, C, B, A, D Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax 99) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. TRIM II. CONCATENATE III. & IV. RIGHT V. SUBSTITUTE A. Combines up to 255 text strings B. An alternative to the concatenate function C. Removes leading and trailing spaces in a text string but maintains spaces between words in a text string D. Replaces old text in a text string with new text E. Returns the specified number of characters from the end of a text string Answer: C, A, B, E, D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Manipulate text with functions

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Flash Fill II. Convert Text to Columns Wizard III. Delimiters IV. CSV V. XML A. eXtensible Markup Language B. A feature in Excel that can often complete the same actions as of the PROPER function C. Comma separated values D. Special characters that separate data E. Used to convert text in to data across separate columns Answer: B, E, D, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 101) What possible issues can occur when using Web queries?

Answer: Issues with Web queries occur with Web sites that require passwords, as well as sites that use Flash or other graphical animations. Excel Web queries can only import text and lack the ability to store passwords. In the event that access to a difficult site is required, the best course of action may be attempting to export text directly from the site into Excel versus using Excel to import the data.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Create a Web query 102) What is the difference between linking imported files and embedding imported files?

Answer: When data is linked to an external reference in Excel, the data can be updated as the external data changes. When data is embedded, the data is permanent and cannot update if the external data changes.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Import data from external sources 103) What are the main components of XML? Answer: XML stand for eXtensible markup language. It is an industry standard for structuring data across multiple applications. XML documents begin with an XML declaration. This tells the corresponding program that the following data is XML. XML is also a tag-3576576based language that is comprised of open and close tags which surround text elements.

Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Understand XML syntax

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 11 Collaboration and Workbook Distribution: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) Information such as author, title, and keywords are examples of document ________.

A) properties B) descriptions C) identifiers D) attributes Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Customization and Personalization 2) You can display the ________ between the Ribbon and the Formula Bar so the document properties are always shown.

A) Document Properties Panel B) Document Information Panel C) Document Properties Pane D) Document Information Pane Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Customization and Personalization 3) You annotate a cell with a reminder by inserting a ________.

A) memo B) notation C) comment D) note Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration 4) A cell with a comment is indicated by ________.

A) a red triangle in the top-right corner of the cell B) italicizing the cell text C) bolding the cell text D) a red cell background Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) To delete a comment from a cell, you: A) double-click the cell and select Delete Comment.

B) right-click the cell and select Delete Comment.

C) click in the comment and click Cut on the HOME tab.

D) click in the comment and Press Delete.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration 6) You use the ________ to find personal data stored in the workbook or personal document properties.

A) Privacy Checker B) Privacy Inspector C) Document Checker D) Document Inspector Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook Information 7) You use the ________ to find any content that might cause difficulties for users.

A) Accessibility Inspector B) Accessibility Checker C) Content Inspector D) Content Checker Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook Information 8) You would use the ________ command to indicate a workbook is complete and to make the file read-only.

A) Lock Workbook B) Finalize Workbook C) Mark as Completed D) Mark as Final Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook Information 9) To distribute a workbook to others so that it retains the same format and cannot be changed, you would save the workbook as a(n) ________ file.

A) PDF B) RTF C) XLSX D) TXT Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Workbook Distribution 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) When saving a workbook to the Web, you click your ________ account in the Save As pane.

A) Facebook B) iCloud Storage C) SkyDrive D) Google Cloud Storage Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: Workbook Distribution 11) To change the user name, you click Info on the FILE tab and enter the new user name.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Customization and Personalization 12) To change the author name, you click Options on the FILE tab and enter the new author name.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Customization and Personalization 13) To edit a comment, you click in the comment and make the desired changes.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration 14) When a workbook is shared, [Shared] is displayed after the file name on the title bar.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration 15) Only shared workbooks can be compared and merged.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Collaboration 16) Check Compatibility is used to verify that critical Excel 2013 features are not lost when a workbook is opened in an earlier version of Excel.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Workbook Information 17) You CANNOT retrieve a lost SkyDrive password.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Workbook Distribution 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 11 Collaboration and Workbook Distribution 1) Which of the following is not an Excel Options category?

A) General B) Formulas C) Format D) Proofing Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 2) AutoCorrect options are located in which Excel Options category?

A) Formulas B) Proofing C) General D) Advanced Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 3) Where do you access the Excel Options dialog box?

A) Backstage B) Formulas tab C) Data tab D) Insert tab Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 4) Which of the following is not a customizable feature within Excel?

A) Username B) Mini Toolbar C) default font size D) Backstage Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 5) Which Excel Options category contains Editing options?

A) General B) Advanced C) Formulas D) Trust Center Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) Which of the following items cannot be added to the Ribbon?

A) Tab B) Group C) Software add-in D) Formula Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 7) Which of the following is not a default command of the Quick Access Toolbar?

A) Close B) Save C) Undo D) Redo Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 8) Which of the following items is not stored as metadata in a workbook?

A) Company B) Imported images C) Creation date D) Author name Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 9) Author properties can be updated from which category in the Backstage view?

A) Account B) Info C) Share D) Options Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 10) Which of the following is not a tab located in the Properties dialog box?

A) General B) Statistics C) Advanced D) Custom Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Change properties

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) Where is the Share Workbook command located within Excel?

A) Data tab B) Insert tab C) Formulas tab D) Review tab Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 12) Which of the following is a limitation of sharing workbooks?

A) 125 users can access at once B) Workbooks that contain tables may not be shared C) Track changes is not supported D) The workbook cannot be printed Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 13) Which of the following scenarios would trigger the Resolve Conflicts dialog box in a shared workbook?

A) Two users attempt to change the same cell at the same time B) Two users open the same file at the same time C) Two users attempt to save the same file at the same time D) Network error Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 14) What is the cause of the error message "File in Use"?

A) A user opens a shared workbook B) A user opens a workbook that is not shared C) Two users open the same unshared workbook D) Two users open the same shared workbook Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 15) What tool is best suited to combine multiple versions of a shared workbook into one document?

A) Merge B) Concatenate C) Compare and Merge D) Combine Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

16) Which of the following is not true about compare and merge?

A) Each user must save a copy with a unique name B) Each version of the file must be saved C) All workbooks must originate from the same file D) Merged workbooks cannot be exported Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 17) Which of the following is not true regarding comments in an Excel workbook?

A) Comments are indicated by a black triangle B) Comments can be edited C) Multiple users can insert comments D) There is no limit to the number of comments in a file Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert comments 18) Where is the New Comment command located?

A) Data tab B) Review tab C) Insert tab D) View tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert comments 19) Which of the following is an option to edit a comment?

A) Click Edit Comment in the Comments Group of the Review tab B) Double click the comment C) Click Edit Comment in the Comments Group of the Insert tab D) Comments cannot be edited Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Insert comments 20) The default comment print setting is: A) as displayed on sheet.

B) only active.

C) at end of sheet.

D) none.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

21) Which of the following changes will Excel not track?

A) Functions B) Formulas C) Deletion D) Formatting Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Track changes 22) Which feature is best suited to record edits made to a document over time?

A) Compare and merge B) Track changes C) Comments D) Sharing Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Track changes 23) Where is the Track Changes feature located?

A) Data tab B) Review tab C) Insert tab D) Formulas tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Track changes 24) When tracking changes, which of the following options is no longer available?

A) Conditional formatting B) Printing C) Sharing D) Saving to SkyDrive Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Track changes 25) Which of the following is a feature of change tracking?

A) Delete changes B) E-mail changes C) Add changes D) Highlight changes Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Track changes

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

26) Which of the following is not an option when highlighting changes?

A) Since I last saved B) Not yet reviewed C) Reviewed D) Since date Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Track changes 27) Which of the following is not a tool to check a workbook for errors?

A) File Inspector B) Document Inspector C) Accessibility Checker D) Compatibility Checker Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Check for issues 28) Which of the following tools is best suited for checking a workbook for personal data?

A) File Inspector B) Document Inspector C) Accessibility Checker D) Compatibility Checker Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Check for issues 29) Where is the Accessibility Checker located?

A) Data tab B) Review tab C) Backstage D) Insert tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Check for issues 30) Which of the following tools is best suited to review your files for potential issues that could hinder the ability of users who access your public files?

A) File Inspector B) Document Inspector C) Accessibility Checker D) Compatibility Checker Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Check for issues

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

31) Which of the following areas is not checked by the Accessibility Checker?

A) Table headers B) Alt text C) Merged cells D) Print area Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Check for issues 32) Which of the following tools is best suited to check the workbook contents to see what data and features are not compatible with previous versions?

A) Accessibility Checker B) Compatibility Checker C) Document Inspector D) File Inspector Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Check for issues 33) Which of the following is not true about a workbook that is Marked as Final?

A) The file is read-only B) The file is marked as shared C) Marked as Final icon appears in the status bar D) The file is not shared Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 34) What is the default file format in Excel 2013?

A) .TXT B) .XLS C) .XLSX D) .XLTX Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 35) Which of following is the default file format for Excel 97-2003?

A) .TXT B) .XLS C) .XLSX D) .XLTX Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

36) Which of the following online storage tools is integrated into Excel 2013?

A) Dropbox B) iCloud C) Google Drive D) SkyDrive Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Send a workbook to others 37) Which of the following is an integrated option for sending files to others?

A) E-mail B) Dropbox C) iCloud D) Google Drive Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Send a workbook to others 38) Which of the following is not a method for protecting the worksheet against changes?

A) Track Changes B) Add a signature line C) Export to PDF D) Mark as Final Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 39) Which of the following Excel Options categories contains information about protecting your privacy?

A) Save B) Trust Center C) Advanced D) Language Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 40) Which dialog box allows the user to print all comments?

A) Page Setup B) Print C) Page Layout D) Backstage Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

41) The Ribbon cannot be customized.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 42) The Quick Access Toolbar can be customized.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 43) Customization of the Quick Access Toolbar can be exported.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 44) Metadata is attached to each Excel workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 45) The user cannot change automatically updated properties .

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 46) Documents can have multiple authors defined in the document properties.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 47) When active, the Document Panel displays above the current workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Change properties 48) To compare and merge workbooks, the workbooks cannot be shared.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 49) When workbooks are shared users can see changes made by others.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

50) Shared workbooks only function properly on network drives that are read-only.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 51) Workbook comments can only be removed one at a time.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments 52) Hidden comments do not print.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments 53) Change tracking can only be activated in shared workbooks.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Track changes 54) When creating a history worksheet using change tracking, the worksheet is automatically saved.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Track changes 55) A workbook marked as final is read-only.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 56) Shared workbooks cannot be marked as final.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 57) A workbook marked as final cannot be password protected.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 58) When a signature line is added, the document becomes read-only.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

59) Excel can export PDF files.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 60) An Internet connection is not required to send an Excel workbook via e-mail.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Send a workbook to others 61) Excel cannot save workbooks for previous versions of Excel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 62) Excel cannot export .CSV files.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 63) A forgotten password within Excel cannot be retrieved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 64) The Document Inspector will remove personal data from a workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Check for issues 65) A cell that contains a comment is marked with a blue triangle.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments 66) Excel customization options can be located in the ________ area.

Answer: Backstage Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 67) The ________ can be customized in Excel.

Answer: Ribbon Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Customize Excel

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

68) When a file is created, customizations such as the author's name are saved as ________.

Answer: metadata Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 69) When displayed, the ________ will show file properties directly above the current workbook.

Answer: Document Panel Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 70) ________ is the process by which two or more individuals work together to achieve an outcome or goal by using software technology and features in Excel.

Answer: Collaboration Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 71) A(n) ________ is a workbook that can be viewed and edited simultaneously by multiple users.

Answer: shared workbook Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 72) The Share Workbook command is located on the ________.

Answer: Review tab Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 73) ________ is the maximum number of users that can access a shared file at once.

Answer: 256 Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 74) The ________ dialog box appears when two users edit the same cell at the same time.

Answer: Resolve Conflicts Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 75) Users will experience difficulties using shared files on a network drive if the network is ________.

Answer: read-only Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

76) When a workbook is opened and the message "File in Use" appears, the workbook is ________.

Answer: nonshareable Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 77) Use the ________ command to combine the shared workbooks into one workbook so that you can compare the changes to decide which ones to keep.

Answer: Compare and merge Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 78) A(n) ________ can be inserted to provide notes or feedback to other users of a workbook.

Answer: comment Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Insert comments 79) A(n) ________ triangle appears in a cell to indicate a comment.

Answer: red Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert comments 80) When printing, by default all comments in a worksheet are ________.

Answer: hidden Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Insert comments 81) In order to track changes, a workbook must be ________.

Answer: shared Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Track changes 82) When change tracking is enabled ________ is unavailable.

Answer: conditional formatting Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Track changes 83) When a history worksheet is created, it is ________ when the file is saved.

Answer: deleted Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Track changes 84) The ________ checks the workbook for personal data.

Answer: Document Inspector Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Check for issues 13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

85) The ________ should be used to make sure your files are backwards compatible.

Answer: Accessibility Checker Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Check for issues 86) Once a workbook is ________ it is read-only.

Answer: marked as final Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 87) If a password is lost is cannot be ________.

Answer: recovered Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook 88) The default file format for Excel 2013 files is ________.

Answer: .XLSX Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 89) Excel files can be exported in different formats from the ________ area.

Answer: Backstage Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 90) Excel will use ________ if sending a workbook via e-mail.

Answer: Outlook Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Send a workbook to others 91) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Formulas II. Proofing III. Save IV. Advanced V. Trust Center A. Keeps documents safe B. Controls advanced settings C. Controls formula calculations, performance, and error handling D. Controls how workbooks are saved E. Controls corrections and formatting Answer: C,E,D,B,A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

92) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. General II. Language III. Customize Ribbon IV. Quick Access Toolbar V. Add-Ins A. Manages add-in programs B. Enables users to customize the Quick Access Toolbar C. Controls general Excel options D. Enables users to customize the Ribbon E. Specifies language preferences Answer: C,E,D,B,A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 93) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Automatic property II. Document properties III. Properties dialog box IV. Document Panel V. Excel Options A. A variety of settings that control how Excel behaves B. Describe or identify a file and include details such as the author's name, title, subject, company, creation date, revision date, and keywords C. Properties which are updated automatically that cannot be changed D. Provides additional document details not provided in the property list E. Displays above the workbook so that you can view and edit properties while reviewing the workbook data Answer: C,B,D,E,A Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

94) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. General II. Summary III. Statistics IV. Contents V. Custom A. Displays properties the user can enter and change, such as title, subject, author, manager, company, category, keywords, and comments B. Displays the file name, file type, location, size, creation date, modification date, and last accessed date C. Displays the worksheet names contained in the workbook D. Includes creation, modified, accessed, and printed dates E. Enables the user to create and maintain custom properties for the current workbook, such as Department, Project, and Purpose Answer: B,A,D,C,E Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Change properties 95) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Collaboration II. Shared workbook III. Resolve Conflicts dialog box IV. Nonshareable workbook V. Compare and Merge A. A file that is designated as shareable and is stored on a network that is accessible to multiple people who can edit the workbook at the same time B. Appears as read-only when opened C. Command to combine the shared workbooks into one workbook so that you can compare the changes to decide which ones to keep D. The process by which two or more individuals work together to achieve an outcome or goal by using software technology E. Appears when two users make changes to the same cell simultaneously Answer: D,A,E,B,C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

96) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Compare and Merge II. Comment III. Comment indicator IV. Page Setup dialog box V. Track Changes A. A red triangle in the upper right corner of a cell B. Command to combine the shared workbooks into one workbook so that you can compare the changes to decide which ones to keep C. A feature that records particular changes made in a workbook D. A note or annotation to ask a question or provide a suggestion to another person about content in a worksheet cell E. Contains preferences on printing comments Answer: B,D,A,E,C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 97) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Accept/Reject Changes II. Highlight Changes III. History worksheet IV. Data tables V. Review tab A. Not supported by change tracking B. Location of Track Changes tools C. When changes are made with Change Tracking on, each cell changed contains a colored triangle in the top-left corner D. View changes in sequence through a dialog box that enables you to accept or reject changes E. A worksheet that lists the changes made to the workbook Answer: D,C,E,A,B Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Track changes

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

98) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Document Inspector II. Accessibility Checker III. Compatibility Checker IV. Mark as Final V. Signature line A. Reviews a workbook for hidden or personal data stored in the workbook or personal document properties, such as author, and then informs you of these details so that you can select what data to remove B. Command communicates that it is a final version and makes the file read-only C. An electronic, encrypted notation that stamps a document to authenticate the contents, confirming that a particular person authorized it D. Checks the workbook contents to see what data and features are not compatible with previous versions E. Reviews your files for potential issues that could hinder the ability of users who access your public files and then alerts you to these issues so that you can address them Answer: A,E,D,B,C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Check for issues 99) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. .xlsx II. .xltx III. .xlsb IV. .csv V. .pdf A. Portable Document Format B. Excel Workbook C. Excel Binary Workbook D. Excel Template E. Comma separated values Answer: B,D,C,E,A Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

100) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. .ods II. .xlsm III. .txt IV. .prn V. .xltx A. Text (Tab delimited) B. OpenDocument Spreadsheet C. Formatted Text (Space delimited) D. Excel Template E. Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook Answer: B,E,A,C,D Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Save a workbook in different formats 101) What are the benefits of customizing Excel?

Answer: Customizing Excel gives the user the ability to function more efficiently and reduce errors in common repetitive tasks. The user can customize the Ribbon for faster access to common tasks, as well as preset author information to insure continuity across multiple projects.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Customize Excel 102) What are the benefits of sharing a workbook?

Answer: Sharing a workbook allows multiple users to access and edit an Excel workbook over a shared network drive. This gives each user flexibility in access locations, as well as the ability to quickly review up-to-date information as it is saved by multiple users.

Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Share and merge workbooks 103) What are some ways to protect a workbook?

Answer: A workbooks can be protected by marking it as final, encrypting the workbook with a password, and adding a digital signature. A signature line can also be added so someone can physically sign a paper copy of the workbook.

Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Protect a workbook

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 12 Templates, Styles, and Macros: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) A ________ is a predefined document structure that defines basic document settings, such as font, margins, and available styles.

A) template B) style C) theme D) pattern Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Templates, Themes, and Styles 2) A ________ is a predefined set of colors, fonts, lines, and special effects that look good together and can be applied to a workbook.

A) form B) theme C) template D) style Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Templates, Themes, and Styles 3) A cell ________ is a collection of format settings such as font and fill colors, borders, and alignment that is based on the currently selected theme to provide a consistent appearance within a worksheet.

A) form B) layout C) style D) template Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Templates, Themes, and Styles 4) To protect a worksheet, you click Format in the ________ group.

A) Cells B) Worksheet C) Workbook D) Editing Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Custom Templates and Workbook Protections

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) When you save a workbook as a template, it is automatically saved to the: A) same folder as the workbook.

B) C:\Users\Username\My Documents\CustomOfficeTemplates folder.

C) Desktop.

D) C:\Users\Username\My Documents folder.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Custom Templates and Workbook Protections 6) To automate the task of clear existing values and displaying instructions for users to enter specific data, you would create a(n) ________.

A) event B) procedure C) argument D) macro Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Macros 7) You use the Macro ________ to capture your commands, keystrokes, and mouse clicks.

A) Register B) Recorder C) Documenter D) Tracker Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 3: Macros 8) To make it easier to run a macro, you can assign the macro to ________.

A) the Ribbon B) a menu C) the Quick Access toolbar D) a button Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Macros 9) A subprocedure is created using the ________.

A) Visual Basic Editor B) Visual Basic Creator C) Procedure Editor D) Procedure Creator Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: Visual Basic for Applications

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) The datestamp object, which was written in the hands-on exercise, is an example of a(n) ________.

A) subprocedure B) custom function C) argument D) parameter Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: Visual Basic for Applications 11) The VBA code to bold the contents of cell H7 is ________.

A) range("H7").Font = Bold B) cell("H7").Font = Bold C) range("H7").Font.Bold = True D) cell("H7").Font.Bold = True Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: Visual Basic for Applications 12) An image can be used as a worksheet background.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Templates, Themes, and Styles 13) When creating a new workbook, you can select a style from the gallery to give your workbook a consistent look.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Templates, Themes, and Styles 14) A protected worksheet can consist of both locked and unlocked cells.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Custom Templates and Workbook Protections 15) If you forget the password to a protected worksheet, you can contact Microsoft to get a replacement password to unprotect it.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Custom Templates and Workbook Protections 16) When creating a new workbook, any templates that you create can be displayed by clicking Personal in the New panel.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Custom Templates and Workbook Protections 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

17) After a macro has been added to a template, you should click Save to save the template with the macro.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Macros 18) A macro can be assigned to more than one object in a worksheet.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: Visual Basic for Applications

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 12 Templates, Styles, and Macros 1) Which of the following is not a tool to improve efficiency in a common workbook that is used by numerous employees in a business?

A) Template B) Macros C) Themes D) Print settings Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select a template 2) Where is the Template gallery located?

A) Insert tab B) Backstage C) Data tab D) Formulas tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select a template 3) Which of the following is not a tool to help provided a unified look and feel within a workbook?

A) Themes B) Custom functions C) Backgrounds D) Styles Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select a template 4) Where is the Themes gallery located?

A) Backstage B) Data tab C) Page Layout tab D) Insert tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Which of the following formats is supported as a background in Excel?

A) jpeg B) mp3 C) .xls D) .mpeg4 Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 6) Where is the Insert Background feature located?

A) Backstage B) Page Layout tab C) Formulas tab D) Insert tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 7) Which of the following is not controlled with cell style formats?

A) Font attributes B) Print settings C) Cell-protection settings D) Border and fill styles Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 8) Which of the following is not a default cell style?

A) Standard B) Bad C) Good D) Neutral Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 9) Which of the following is not a predefined cell style category?

A) Data and Model B) Number Format C) Titles and Headings D) Analysis Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles

2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Where are the default cell styles located?

A) Styles group B) Editing group C) Format group D) Cells group Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 11) Which of the following is not a good practice when creating a template?

A) Using descriptive labels B) Using cell references in formulas C) Locking view settings D) Including instructions Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 12) What is the default file extension for a template?

A) .xls B) .xlsx C) .xltx D) .xlm Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 13) What is the default save location for templates?

A) C:\Users\username\Documents\CustomOfficeTemplates B) C:\Users\MyDocuments C) C:\templates D) C:\Users\templates Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 14) Which of the following is not true about locked cells?

A) Locked cells can be edited B) All cells are locked by default C) A password is required to unlock the cells D) A locked cell is indicated by a padlock icon in the Format menu Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) Which of the following is true about a protected worksheet?

A) It cannot be saved B) It cannot be printed C) It cannot be edited D) It cannot be shared on SkyDrive Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 16) What is the password character limit in Excel?

A) 325 B) 255 C) 355 D) 100 Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 17) Which of the following is not prevented when a worksheet is protected?

A) Inserting B) Printing C) Deleting D) Copying Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 18) Which of the following formats does not support macros?

A) .xlsm B) .xlsb C) .xltm D) .xlsx Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a macro 19) Which of the following tools is best suited to complete repetitive tasks in Excel?

A) Macros B) Templates C) Styles D) Themes Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Which of the following is a method for creating macros?

A) Macro recorder B) Formula builder C) Insert function button D) Developer tools Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 21) What is the default folder for Personal Macro Workbooks in Windows 8?

A) C:\Users\Username\documents B) C:\Users\Username\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Excel\XLStart C) C:\Users\Username\AppData\Roaming\XLStart D) C:\Users\Username\Excel Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a macro 22) Which of the following is the file extension for a Personal Macro Workbook?

A) .xls B) .xlxs C) .xltm D) .xlsb Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 23) What is the default reference type when recording a macro?

A) Absolute B) Relative C) Mixed D) Normalitive Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 24) Where can a macro be deleted?

A) Backstage B) Macro dialog box C) Developer tab D) Insert tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create a macro

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) Which of the following tabs contains Form Controls?

A) Insert B) Data C) Developer D) Formulas Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Create macro buttons 26) Which of the formats below will not support sub procedures using VBA? A) .xlsm B) .xlsx C) .xlsb D) .xltm Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 27) Which of the following is the proper beginning for a sub procedure named "Test"?

A) Sub () B) Sub (Test) C) (Test) D) Sub Test() Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 28) Which of the following items is not stored inside VBA modules?

A) Sub procedures B) Keywords C) Comments D) Index documents Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 29) Which of the following are used in VBA to leave notes or instructions regarding the macro?

A) Comments B) Keywords C) Indicators D) Index notes Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

30) Comments in VBA appear in what color?

A) Red B) Green C) Blue D) Black Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 31) Which of the following is not a Trust Center option?

A) Trusted App Catalogs B) Trusted Publishers C) Trusted Calculations D) Message Bar Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Set macro security 32) Where are Trust Center options located?

A) Data tab B) Backstage C) Insert tab D) Formulas tab Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Set macro security 33) Which of the following objects can be used to launch a macro?

A) Chart B) Function C) Image D) Hyperlink Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Create macro buttons 34) Which of the following is not an Office theme?

A) Office B) Integral C) Helvetica D) Frame Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

35) Which of the following cannot be modified in a custom cell style?

A) Number B) Alignment C) Print area D) Fill Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 36) Where are custom cell styles saved?

A) The workbook in which you created the style B) A personal styles workbook C) My Documents D) A personal macro workbook Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 37) Which function should be used to mask zero values in templates?

A) IF B) IFERROR C) VLOOKUP D) INDEX Answer: B Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 38) Where is the Protect Sheet command located in the Ribbon?

A) Backstage B) Formulas tab C) Review tab D) Data tab Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 39) Where are macros recorded with the macro recorder stored?

A) The current workbook B) The Templates folder C) The templates gallery D) My Documents Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

40) Which of the following is not a best practice when creating a macro?

A) Practice the steps before starting B) Determine whether absolute or relative references should be used C) Start and stop the recording as needed D) Ensure the macros are broad enough to apply to multiple situations Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 41) Templates can be located and downloaded in the templates gallery.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select a template 42) Custom backgrounds can be applied to Excel worksheets.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 43) Once applied custom backgrounds cannot be deleted.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 44) Font attributes can be controlled with cell styles.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 45) Good, Bad, and Neutral are predefined cell styles.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 46) A user can create custom cell styles.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 47) Custom cell styles cannot be removed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

48) Custom styles cannot be applied to other workbooks.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 49) All templates should contain instructions.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 50) When creating templates, IFERROR should be used to mask zero values.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 51) By default all cells are locked.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 52) Once lost, a password cannot be retrieved.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 53) The maximum number of characters for a password is 255.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 54) .xlsb files do not support macros.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Create a macro 55) Macros are stored in modules.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 56) The macro recorder can append a previously recorded macro.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

57) By default, the macro recorder uses absolute references.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 58) Form controls are located on the Developer tab.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create macro buttons 59) Comments cannot be viewed in the VBA editor.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 60) Custom functions can be created with the macro recorder.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Create a custom function 61) The VBA editor can be opened with the key stroke Alt+F11.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Create a custom function 62) A run time error will occur if a sub procedure is run on a protected workbook.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 63) Macro settings cannot be edited in the Trust Center.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Set macro security 64) Once created, macro buttons cannot be deleted.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Create macro buttons 65) Once created a custom function cannot be edited.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Create a custom function

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

66) A ________ is a partially completed document that you use as a model to create other documents that have the same structure and purpose.

Answer: template Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Select a template 67) New templates can be located and viewed in the ________.

Answer: Template gallery Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select a template 68) A ________ is a collection of formats that include coordinating colors, fonts, and special effects to provide a stylish appearance.

Answer: theme Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 69) The Themes gallery is located on the ________ tab.

Answer: Page Layout Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 70) An image used to classify a document as confidential can be placed as a custom ________ in a workbook.

Answer: background Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 71) A(n) ________ is a collection of format settings based on the currently selected theme to provide a consistent appearance within a worksheet and among similar workbooks.

Answer: cell style Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 72) Data and Model, Titles and Headings, and Number Format are all examples of predefined ________.

Answer: cell styles Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles 73) Custom cell styles are stored in the ________ workbook.

Answer: current Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles

12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

74) The ________ function should be used to trap errors when creating templates.

Answer: IFERROR Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Create and use a template 75) By default all cells in a workbook are ________.

Answer: locked Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 76) Locked cells cannot be ________.

Answer: edited Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 77) Cells can be locked from the ________ group on the Home tab.

Answer: Cells Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 78) Excel passwords can be up to ________ characters.

Answer: 255 Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 79) A ________ is a set of instructions that execute a sequence of commands to automate repetitive or routine tasks.

Answer: Macro Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 80) The file extension for an Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook is ________.

Answer: .xlsm Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 81) Recorded macros can be viewed in the ________.

Answer: VBA editor Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 82) By default, the Developer tab is ________.

Answer: disabled Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Create a macro

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

83) By default, the macro recorder uses ________ references.

Answer: absolute Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 84) By default, macros in Excel are ________.

Answer: disabled Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Set macro security 85) Macro security can be edited in the ________.

Answer: Trust Center Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Set macro security 86) Privacy options can be edited in the ________.

Answer: Trust Center Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Set macro security 87) Macros are stored in ________.

Answer: modules Diff: 1 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 88) The VBA editor can be access using the keystroke combination ________.

Answer: Alt+F11 Diff: 3 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 89) ________ can be placed in VBA to provide information regarding a macro.

Answer: Comments Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 90) Macros can be edited in the ________.

Answer: VBA Editor Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Create a custom function

14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

91) Match the following terms with the corresponding description: I. Template II. Theme III. Cell style IV. Template gallery V. Background A. An image placed behind the worksheet data B. A partially completed document that you use as a model to create other documents that have the same structure and purpose C. A collection of formats that include coordinating colors, fonts, and special effects to provide a stylish appearance D. Provides the ability to search and download Excel templates E. A collection of format settings based on the currently selected theme to provide a consistent appearance within a worksheet and among similar workbooks Answer: B, C, E, D, A Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Apply themes and backgrounds 92) Match the following five predefined cell style categories with the corresponding definition: I. Good, Bad, and Neutral II. Data and Model III. Titles and Headings IV. Themed Cell Styles V. Number Format A. Use to format titles and headings, such as column and row labels, for emphasis B. Use Accent styles for visual emphasis. These cell styles are dependent on the currently selected theme C. Provide the same formatting as commands in the Number group on the Home tab D. Use to indicate special cell contents, such as a calculated result, input cell, output cell, or warning E. Use to emphasize bad, good, or neutral results, or click Normal to reset a cell to its original default setting Answer: E, D, A, B, C Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Apply cell styles

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

93) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Locked cell II. Unlocked cell III. Password IV. Protected worksheet V. Unprotected worksheet A. A word or phrase up to 255 characters in length used to unlock a protected worksheet B. A worksheet in which locked cells cannot be edited C. A cell that prevents users from editing the contents or formatting of that cell in a protected worksheet D. When the worksheet is protected, these cells are able to be edited E. The default state for all Excel worksheets Answer: C, D, A, B, E Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Protect a cell, a worksheet, and a workbook 94) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. .xlsm II. .xlsb III. .xltm IV. .xlsx V. .xls A. Default Excel workbook format B. Excel Macro-Enabled Workbook C. Excel Binary Workbook D. Excel Macro-Enabled Template E. Excel 97 workbook format Answer: B, C, D, A, E Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro

16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) Match the following terms with the corresponding descriptions: I. Visual Basic for Applications II. Macro Recorder III. Sub procedure IV. Module V. Custom function A. A file in which macros are stored B. A robust programming language that is the underlying code of all macros C. Specialized functions created within VBA that can be used within a worksheet D. Records your commands, keystrokes, and mouse clicks to store Excel commands as VBA code within a workbook E. Visual Basic scripts that perform actions Answer: B, D, E, A, C Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 96) Match the following Trust Center options with the correct description: I. Add-Ins II. Privacy Options III. Trusted Documents IV. Trusted Publishers V. File Block Settings A. Enables you to trust network documents to open without Excel displaying any security warnings B. Directs Excel to trust digitally signed workbooks by certain creators C. Enables you to select which types of files, such as macros, to open in Protected View or which file type to prevent saving a file in D. Enables you to deal with nonmacro privacy issues E. Enables you to specify which add-ins will be allowed to run given the desired level of security Answer: E, D, A, B, C Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Set macro security

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

97) Match the following terms to the corresponding description: I. Visual Basic for Applications II. Keyword III. Comment IV. Module V. Sub procedure A. A Visual Basic script that performs actions B. A robust programming language that is the underlying code of all macros C. A file in which macros are stored D. Special programming syntax that have special meaning with the programming language and must be used for their intended purposes E. Indicated by an apostrophe and appear in green, provide information about the macro but do not affect its execution and are considered documentation Answer: B, D, E, C, A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 98) Match the following terms to the corresponding description: I. Object II. Run Time Error III. Visual Basic for Applications IV. Sub procedure V. Module A. A Visual Basic script that performs actions B. A robust programming language that is the underlying code of all macros C. A software or hardware problem that prevents a program from working correctly D. A file in which macros are stored E. A variable that contains both data and code and represents an element of Excel such as Range or Selection Answer: E, C, B, A, D Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

99) Match the following terms to the corresponding description: I. Personal Macro Workbook II. Visual Basic Editor III. Macro Recorder IV. Module V. Object A. A variable that contains both data and code and represents an element of Excel such as Range or Selection B. A file in which macros are stored C. An application used to create, edit, execute, and debug Office application macros using programming code D. Records your commands, keystrokes, and mouse clicks to store Excel commands as VBA code within a workbook E. Stores macros that can be accessed by any Excel workbook Answer: E,C,D,B,A Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Create a sub procedure 100) Match the following terms to the corresponding description: I. Absolute reference II. Form control button III. Developer tab IV. Trust Center V. Personal macro workbook A. Stores macros that can be accessed by any Excel workbook B. Contains security options for Microsoft Excel C. An object that can have added functionality when partnered with a macro D. The default reference option when using the macro recorder E. Contains the Form Controls tools Answer: D, C, E, B, A Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 101) What are the benefits if using templates in the workplace?

Answer: Templates serve the dual purpose of increased efficiency and continuity in the workplace. Templates insure a consistent look and feel by automatically inserting basic information such as theme, style, and font color. Templates also increase efficiency by reducing the time spent formatting for final presentation.

Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Select a template

19 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

102) What are the benefits of using macros?

Answer: Macros have the ability to automatically complete tasks in Excel. When using macros, the user gains increased efficiency through the reduction of repetitive tasks. The novice user also gains the ability to complete complex tasks without advanced knowledge of programming.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro 103) What business practices should be used when creating a macro?

Answer: When creating a macro using the Macro Recorder, it is important to note that every action will be recorded and replayed. Before creating the macro you should determine the best course of action and practice the steps before beginning. It is also important to note that when using the Macro Recorder all references are absolute. You should determine what mixed, absolute, or relative references are needed and apply the settings before you begin.

Diff: 2 Objective: 6. Create a macro

20 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 1 Office Fundamentals and File Management: Hands-On-Exercise Videos 1) To create a Microsoft account, you log in to ________.

A) microsoft.com B) office.com C) live.com D) accounts.com Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup 2)

In the figure shown above, the objects at the right of the screen image are called ________.

A) Charms B) Tiles C) Apps D) Quick Access Toolbars Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

3)

The figure shown above depicts the ________ screen.

A) Desktop B) Start C) File Explorer D) Internet Explorer Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup 4) When using Windows 8, ________ is the app that is used to create and manage files and folders.

A) Windows Explorer B) File Manager C) File Explorer D) Folder Manager Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 5) Which of the following is the Windows Explorer icon?

A) B) C) D) Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

6) To delete a folder, you: A) double-click the folder and click Delete from the menu.

B) right-click the folder and click Delete from the menu.

C) click the folder and click Delete on the Ribbon.

D) click the folder and click Delete in the Homegroup.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 7) ________ 2013 is the Office application that is used to store data and perform fast and accurate calculations.

A) Excel B) Outlook C) Access D) PowerPoint Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Microsoft Office Software 8) ________ is the keyboard shortcut to access Office help.

A) Ctrl + F1 B) Shift + F1 C) Alt + F1 D) F1 Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 9) Which of the following is NOT a default Quick Access Toolbar button?

A) Save B) New C) Undo D) Redo Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 3: Microsoft Office Software 10) Which of the following is NOT a Backstage View task?

A) Opening a file B) Saving a file C) Copying a file D) Printing a file Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: HOE 4: The Backstage View Tasks

3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

11) A ________ such as a calendar is a predesigned file that includes formatting elements and may include some content.

A) style B) template C) theme D) layout Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: The Backstage View Tasks 12)

In the image shown above, the arrow is pointing at a page displayed in ________.

A) Live Preview B) Print Preview C) Page Layout View D) Design View Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 4: The Backstage View Tasks

4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

13)

The image shown above depicts the ________.

A) Ribbon B) Mini toolbar C) Navigation Pane D) Quick Access Toolbar Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Home Tab Tasks 14) You can use the ________ to quickly copy formatting from one section of text to another.

A) Quick Access Toolbar B) Ribbon C) Clipboard D) Format Painter Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 5: Home Tab Tasks 15)

The figure shown above depicts the ________ dialog box.

A) Paragraph B) Font C) Styles D) Page setup Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Home Tab Tasks

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

16) A word underlined with a red wavy line indicates a ________.

A) formatting error B) potentially misspelled word C) grammatical problem D) word usage error Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 6: Insert Tab Tasks, Page Layout Tab Tasks, and Review Tab Tasks 17) The blank areas at the top, bottom, left, and right of a document are the ________.

A) borders B) boundaries C) Decrease Decimal D) margins Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 6: Insert Tab Tasks, Page Layout Tab Tasks, and Review Tab Tasks 18) Landscape and Portrait are examples of page ________.

A) alignment B) arrangement C) positioning D) orientation Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 6: Insert Tab Tasks, Page Layout Tab Tasks, and Review Tab Tasks 19) SkyDrive is the default location for saving a file created in an Office 2013 application.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup 20) When creating a Microsoft account, a CAPTCHA is used to help verify that a real person is creating an account.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

21)

In the figure shown above, the rectangular objects in the middle of the screen image are called Charms.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 1: Windows 8 Startup 22) A file is a collection of folders.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 23) You use the Navigation Pane to access computer resources, folder, files, and networked peripherals.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 2: Files and Folders 24) When using an Office 2013 application, the title bar displays the current file and which application is being used.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Microsoft Office Software 25) The Save command allows you to name a file and determine the location where it is stored.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 3: Microsoft Office Software 26) A page displayed in landscape view is taller than it is wide.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: The Backstage View Tasks

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

27) When displaying a document in Print Preview, the Magnifier can be used enlarge or shrink the size of the previewed page.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 4: The Backstage View Tasks 28) Sizing, spacing, color, and boldfacing are examples of font attributes.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 5: Home Tab Tasks 29) You would use the thesaurus to find misspelled words.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: HOE 6: Insert Tab Tasks, Page Layout Tab Tasks, and Review Tab Tasks 30) Typing bare instead of bear is an example of a word usage error and will have a blue underline.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: HOE 6: Insert Tab Tasks, Page Layout Tab Tasks, and Review Tab Tasks

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

Exploring Microsoft Excel 2013, Comprehensive (Poatsy) Chapter 1 Office Fundamentals and File Management 1) An operating system is: A) technology used to access files saved in the cloud.

B) software available only on desktops and laptops, not on tablets or other small, portable devices.

C) software that directs activities of a computer.

D) an app installed on a desktop or laptop.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 2) After you start your computer and enter your username and password, ________ displays in Windows 8.

A) the desktop B) each Charm C) the Mini toolbar D) the Start screen Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 3) Which of the following is an app used to store, access, and share files and folders?

A) SkyDrive B) Windows 8 C) Snipping Tool D) Cloud storage Answer: A Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 4) Which of the following is NOT part of the Windows 8 initial screen display?

A) User identification in the top-right corner B) Tiles C) The Start button D) The Start screen Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components

1 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

5) Which of the following is FALSE about Charms in Windows 8?

A) There are six icons that make up the Charms in Windows 8.

B) Charms can be accessed by pointing to the top-right of the screen.

C) Charms provide similar functionality to the Start button in previous Windows versions.

D) Charms can be accessed by pointing to the bottom-right of the screen.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 6) Which of the following is TRUE about tiles?

A) New tiles added to the Start screen are added to the beginning of your apps.

B) Tiles can be dragged to a new location on the Start screen.

C) Tiles can be pinned to the Start screen but cannot be unpinned.

D) You can remove a tile from the Start screen by double-clicking it and clicking Unpin from Start.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 3. Interact with the Start screen 7) Which of the following is TRUE about the Notification area of Windows 8?

A) It doesn't exist in Windows 8.

B) It is available as a tile on the Start screen.

C) It is displayed in the bottom-right corner of the desktop.

D) It is accessible from the Start button.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 8) If you have not made any changes to the default settings of Windows 8, which icons are available on the taskbar?

A) Internet Explorer and Snipping Tool B) File Explorer and Internet Explorer C) File Explorer, Internet Explorer, and Microsoft Office D) Desktop and Start screen Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 9) Which of the following is NOT an available option for a snip in the Snipping Tool?

A) Desktop Snip B) Free-form Snip C) Window Snip D) Rectangle Snip Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 2 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

10) Which of the following is TRUE about files?

A) Software is used to create folders, not files.

B) For a file to be accessed at a later time, it must be stored only on the computer's hard drive.

C) A digital photograph or music can be a file.

D) Files contain folders.

Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 11) Which of the following is FALSE about folders?

A) Folders can be managed in File Explorer.

B) Folders contained within other folders are known as file folders.

C) The sole purpose of a folder is to provide a location for related files.

D) Folders can be created within other folders.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 12) Which of the following is NOT part of the File Explorer interface?

A) Navigation Pane B) Status bar C) Content pane D) Address bar Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 13) By default, after you click the SkyDrive tile on the Windows 8 Start screen, which of the following items will NOT display?

A) Documents B) Pictures C) Public Shared D) Libraries Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 6. Work with folders and files 14) In File Explorer, use the ________ key if you want to select a full range of files that are adjacent.

A) Shift B) Tab C) Ctrl D) Alt Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders 3 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

15) To select a variety of files that are not adjacent in order to delete them as a group, hold down ________ while selecting each one.

A) F1 B) Alt C) Shift D) Ctrl Answer: D Diff: 3 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders 16) Microsoft ________ is most appropriate to use to create a memo for business use.

A) Word B) Excel C) PowerPoint D) Access Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 17) Which of the following is NOT a feature or function available by using Backstage in Office 2013?

A) Save a file B) View file properties C) Move a file D) Close a file Answer: C Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 18) What information does the title bar of Office 2013 contain?

A) The file name and the application B) The file name and the drive C) The file name, folder name, and drive D) The application and the drive Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 19) When do contextual tabs display in Office 2013?

A) When you select a paragraph in a document B) When you right-click the Ribbon and check a conceptual tab name C) When you click the Home tab D) When you select an object in a document Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 4 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

20) Which of the following statements is FALSE about the status bar in Office 2013?

A) The status bar is located at the bottom of the Office 2013 window.

B) Contents viewable on the status bar are standard in all Office applications.

C) Slide number and total slide information are displayed in PowerPoint.

D) Summary information is displayed in Excel.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 21) Many dialog boxes offer a help feature by clicking: A) the F12 key.

B) a question mark.

C) the F1 key.

D) a light bulb.

Answer: B Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Get Office Help 22) Which of the following is TRUE about the Recent Documents list in Office 2013?

A) It constantly changes.

B) It is accessed from the Home tab.

C) All files located on your hard drive can be accessed from it.

D) It can be quickly accessed with the F10 key.

Answer: A Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Open a file 23) What does clicking the pushpin next to each file name on the Recent Documents list do?

A) The file will remain on the Recent Documents list for one full week.

B) The file will remain on the Recent Documents list indefinitely.

C) The file can be "pinned" to a particular folder that you designate.

D) The file is available to be "pinned" to the Quick Access Toolbar.

Answer: B Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Open a file 24) Printing a document is available from the ________ tab.

A) File B) Home C) View D) Page Layout Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 11. Print a file

5 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

25) When you close a document in Office 2013, what happens to the application?

A) It automatically remains open for a minimum of 10 additional minutes.

B) It also closes with the document.

C) If you close two of more documents simultaneously, the application closes; if only one document is closed, the application remains open.

D) The application remains open.

Answer: D Diff: 2 Objective: 12. Close a file and application 26) Of the four Microsoft Office 2013 programs, the ________ Home tab is the most unique and different than the other programs.

A) Access B) Word C) PowerPoint D) Excel Answer: A Diff: 1 Objective: 13. Select and edit text 27) The small dots that surround an object at each corner and in the middle of each side are known as: A) sliders.

B) buttons.

C) handles.

D) toggles.

Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 16. Insert objects 28) In regard to spelling and grammar in Office 2013, it is important to know that, in general: A) you turn on the Spelling and Grammar features in all applications.

B) only a small selection of words will be checked as you type; the rest must be accessed through the Spelling and Grammar features.

C) all Office applications check your spelling and grammar as you type.

D) Word and PowerPoint check spelling and grammar as you type; Access and Excel do not.

Answer: C Diff: 3 Objective: 17. Review a file

6 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

29) It is most attractive and common that Word documents are printed in ________ orientation.

Excel documents are most often printed in ________ orientation.

A) landscape; landscape B) landscape; portrait C) portrait; landscape D) portrait; portrait Answer: C Diff: 1 Objective: 17. Review a file 30) To set or change margins in a presentation, click the ________ tab.

A) Home B) Design C) Insert D) Page Layout Answer: D Diff: 1 Objective: 18. Use the Page Setup dialog box 31) Windows 8 is an Intel operating system.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 32) You can log in to Windows 8 as a local network user, or you can log in using a Microsoft account, but you cannot do both in the same session.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 33) Desktop and SkyDrive are examples of Windows 8 apps.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 34) Charms include Mail and SkyDrive.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 35) When dragging a group of tiles on the Windows 8 Start screen, a light gray vertical bar displays to indicate where the new group will be located.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Interact with the Start screen

7 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

36) The Desktop tile does not display on the Windows 8 Start screen.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 37) The Notification area of Windows 8 is displayed in the bottom-left corner of the Start screen.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 38) When you use the Search box in File Explorer, you must type the full search string prior to the program searching for your results.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 39) Windows 8 does not include libraries like Windows 7 did.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 40) Folders can only be created in File Explorer, not within software programs.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Work with folders and files 41) SkyDrive can be directly accessed from the Windows 8 Start screen.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 6. Work with folders and files 42) When you move all files from a folder in one location to a folder in another location, the files are duplicated so that they are located in both the original folder location as well as the folder to which they were moved.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders 43) Windows 8 offers a feature to show checkboxes next to files and folder names to select in order to move, delete, or copy.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders

8 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

44) In Office 2013, the Help button is located on the Ribbon.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 45) By default, the Quick Access Toolbar displays above the Ribbon in Office 2013.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 46) The Zoom slider is always displayed at the far left side of the status bar.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 47) A professionally-created file such as a budget offered by Microsoft Office and often downloaded from the Microsoft Web site is known as a template.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Open a file 48) Increasing the font size while in Print Preview by using the zoom increases the actual font size of the document when printed.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 11. Print a file 49) Click the File tab, and then click the Exit button to close a Microsoft Office application.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 12. Close a file and application 50) You can add your own buttons and features to the Mini toolbar in Office 2013.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 2 Objective: 13. Select and edit text 51) When you use the Find and Replace feature in Office 2013 you can narrow the search to only find whole words.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 15. Use the Editing group commands

9 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

52) A picture could be a clip art item that you save from the Internet to your hard drive or cloud storage.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 16. Insert objects 53) The mouse pointer changes to a four-headed arrow when you resize an object.

Answer: FALSE Diff: 1 Objective: 16. Insert objects 54) When using the Spelling & Grammar button to check a document, each identified error is highlighted in a pane within the window.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 2 Objective: 17. Review a file 55) The Page Setup dialog box offers options to customize margins, select page orientation, and center documents vertically.

Answer: TRUE Diff: 1 Objective: 18. Use the Page Setup dialog box 56) ________ is a Microsoft operating system released in 2012.

Answer: Windows 8 Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 57) The ________ screen is displayed after starting up your computer and entering a username and password, if necessary.

Answer: Start Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 58) ________ storage is technology used to store files and work with programs that are accessed through the Internet.

Answer: Cloud Diff: 2 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 59) ________ is the default location for saving files for Office 2013 applications.

Answer: SkyDrive Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account

10 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

60) ________ are made up of five icons that provide functionality to the Start button in Windows 8.

Answer: Charms Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 61) ________ are colorful block images on the Windows 8 Start screen.

Answer: Tiles Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 62) Removing a tile from the Windows 8 Start screen can be done by right-clicking the tile and clicking ________ from Start.

Answer: Unpin Diff: 2 Objective: 3. Interact with the Start screen 63) The ________ is a Windows 8 program that allows you to capture a screen display.

Answer: Snipping Tool Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 64) ________ are folders located within other folders.

Answer: Subfolders Diff: 1 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 65) The ________ contains five areas: Favorites, Libraries, Homegroup, Computer, and Network.

Answer: Navigation Pane Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 66) The ________ bar informs a user of the current drive or folder.

Answer: Address Diff: 2 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 67) A(n) ________ is a Windows 8 feature that allows you to share music, pictures, and libraries with other people within a home network.

Answer: Homegroup Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer

11 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

68) Click select all files in an open folder, press and hold ________, and press the A key.

Answer: Ctrl Diff: 2 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders 69) A(n) ________ copy of a file or folder should be copied to another drive in case the original drive is damaged or the data is lost for some reason.

Answer: backup Diff: 1 Objective: 7. Select, copy, and move multiple files and folders 70) Press the ________ key to display keyboard shortcuts.

Answer: Alt Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 71) The ________ is located at the bottom of the window in Office 2013 and contains file information.

Answer: status bar Diff: 3 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 72) The ________ key on the keyboard accesses Help in Office 2013.

Answer: F1 Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Get Office Help 73) An enhanced ________ displays in Office 2013 when the mouse pointer is placed over a button.

Answer: ScreenTip Diff: 2 Objective: 9. Get Office Help 74) Predesigned files provided within Office are called ________.

Answer: templates Diff: 2 Objective: 10. Open a file 75) The ________ toolbar provides a quick way to format text in Office 2013.

Answer: Mini Diff: 2 Objective: 13. Select and edit text 76) A key or feature that can be turned on or off is known as a(n) ________ command.

Answer: toggle Diff: 2 Objective: 13. Select and edit text 12 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

77) An area of memory reserved to temporarily hold selections that have been cut or copied from a document is known as the ________.

Answer: Clipboard Diff: 1 Objective: 14. Use the Clipboard group commands 78) The ________ allows you to quickly and easily copy formatting from one area of a document to another.

Answer: Format Painter Diff: 2 Objective: 14. Use the Clipboard group commands 79) The Replace button is located on the ________ tab in Office 2013.

Answer: Home Diff: 2 Objective: 15. Use the Editing group commands 80) ________ options are the settings that are in effect when an application is installed. Spelling and grammar checker as active is one example of this.

Answer: Default Diff: 2 Objective: 17. Review a file 81) Match the following terms with their description: I. Start screen II. operating system III. Windows 8 IV. SkyDrive V. cloud storage A. displays after starting your Windows 8 computer B. released in 2012 C. used to store files and to work with programs located on the Internet D. an app used to store, access, and share files and folder E. software that directs computer activities Answer: A, E, B, D, C Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives

13 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

82) Match the following terms with their description: I. Charms II. Start button III. Start screen IV. Windows 8 app V. tiles A. designed to run in the Start screen of Windows 8 B. colorful block images on the Windows 8 Start screen C. functionality similar to the Start button in previous Windows versions D. not a part of Windows 8 E. made up of several tiles Answer: C, D, E, A, B Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 83) Match the following parts of the File Explorer interface with their function: I. Address bar II. Content pane III. Details pane IV. Navigation pane V. Toolbar A. shows currently selected folder or library B. shows properties associated with a selected file C. includes buttons relevant to currently selected item D. contains Favorites, Libraries, Homegroup, Computer, and Network E. navigate to other folders or libraries Answer: E, A, B, D, C Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer 84) Match the following keyboard shortcuts in many programs with their function: I. Ctrl+C II. Ctrl+V III. Ctrl+Z IV. Ctrl+X V. Ctrl+A A. Copy B. Paste C. Select all D. Undo E. Cut Answer: A, B, D, E, C Diff: 1 Objective: Multiple objectives 14 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

85) Match the following components of Office 2013 and their function: I. Backstage view II. Quick Access Toolbar III. title bar IV. Ribbon V. Dialog Box Launcher A. easy access to commonly executed tasks B. displays the current file name and application C. used to print, save, open, close, and share a file D. contains tabs, groups, and commands E. opens a corresponding box that provides access to precise tools Answer: C, A, B, D, E Diff: 1 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 86) Match the following Microsoft Office 2013 features with the tab where they can be found: I. access Backstage view II. tab that automatically displays when a file is opened III. create a footer in Word IV. change the zoom level V. change margins in Word A. File tab B. View tab C. Page Layout tab D. Insert tab E. Home tab Answer: A, E, D, B, C Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives

15 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

87) Match the following shortcut actions to the selection in Word or PowerPoint: I. double-click II. triple-click III. press and hold Ctrl while you click to select IV. press and hold Shift while you press the right arrow key V. press and hold Ctrl while you press the letter A A. a sentence B. a paragraph C. one character to the right D. entire document E. a word Answer: E, B, A, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 88) Match the grammar or spelling error with the Office 2013 identification or button to click: I. you write "there" instead of "their" II. you write "recieve" instead of "receive" III. you leave out a necessary comma IV. you want it to not stop on your name in the future V. you want to bypass all occurrences of "daycare" A. Ignore All B. red wavy underline C. green underline D. blue underline E. Add to Dictionary Answer: D, B, C, E, A Diff: 2 Objective: 15. Use the Editing group commands 89) Match the following features or parts of Office 2013 to their description: I. contextual tab II. Mini toolbar III. title bar IV. gallery V. status bar A. easy access to formatting commands B. contains groups of commands related to a specific, selected object C. set of selections when you click a More button D. contains information relative to the open file E. includes file name and application Answer: B, A, E, C, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 16 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

90) Match the following Microsoft Office 2013 feature with the tab where it can be found: I. open Office Backstage II. modify text III. create a new chart in Excel IV. modify an object V. change margins in Word A. contextual tab B. File tab C. Home tab D. Page Layout tab E. Insert tab Answer: B, C, E, A, D Diff: 2 Objective: Multiple objectives 91) What is the default location for saving files in Office 2013 applications? Briefly describe it.

Answer: SkyDrive is the default location for saving files in Office 2013. SkyDrive is an app used to store, access, and share files and folders.

Diff: 3 Objective: 1. Log in with your Microsoft account 92) Describe tiles.

Answer: Tiles are colorful block images available on the Windows 8 Start screen. When you click a tile, you will be taken to a program, file, folder, or other Windows 8 app. Tiles include the name of the app or program.

Diff: 2 Objective: 2. Identify the Start screen components 93) When might you want to use the Snipping Tool?

Answer: The Snipping Tool, a Windows 8 accessory program, can be used to take a screen image that can be saved, annotated, or shared into and with other programs. The Snipping Tools offers Free-form, Rectangle, Window, and Full-screen snips.

Diff: 2 Objective: 4. Access the desktop 94) Describe the function of Homegroup in Windows 8.

Answer: Homegroup is a Windows 8 feature that enables you to share resources on a home network. Music, pictures, videos, and libraries can easily be shared in a home network through a Homegroup. It is password protected.

Diff: 3 Objective: 5. Use File Explorer

17 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.

95) What is a theme in Microsoft Office 2013?

Answer: A theme is a collection of design choices that includes colors, fonts, and special effects used to give a consistent look to a document, workbook, or presentation.

Diff: 2 Objective: 8. Identify common interface components 96) Name at least four tasks that are available in Microsoft Office 2013 Backstage view.

Answer: You can open saved files, create new files, print items, and save and close files. In Backstage view, you can also indicate options, preferences, and settings in the program you are using. You can also exit an application as well as identify file information, such as the author or date created.

Diff: 3 Objective: 10. Open a file 97) When and how does the Mini toolbar appear in Office 2013? What is it used for?

Answer: When any amount of text is selected within a worksheet, document, or presentation, you can slightly move the mouse pointer within the selection to display the Mini toolbar. The Mini toolbar provides access to most common formatting selections.

Diff: 3 Objective: 13. Select and edit text 98) What can you do from the Clipboard group on the Home tab?

Answer: You can copy and cut text as well as objects from the Clipboard group. You can also paste as well as copy and paste formats from one location in a document to another.

Diff: 2 Objective: 14. Use the Clipboard group commands 99) What happens when you press Ctrl+F in a Word file?

Answer: Ctrl+F is a shortcut used to find items. Ctrl+F opens the Navigation Pane on the left side of the Word document. When you type a search term in the Search Document area, Word finds and highlights all occurrences of that search term.

Diff: 2 Objective: 15. Use the Editing group commands 100) Describe SmartArt in Office 2013.

Answer: SmartArt is a diagram that presents information visually to effectively communicate a message. SmartArt is considered an object and can be managed independently of an underlying document, worksheet, or presentation.

Diff: 2 Objective: 16. Insert objects

18 Copyright © 2014 Pearson Education, Inc.